Home

2011 Jeep Compass Owner Manual

1. REEDE e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION 944 545 ees Be n ER WK RE eae ea EN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING sesse ss see sesse TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B introduction INTRODUCTION B Rollover Warning leere Mi How To Use This Manual 4 W Warnings And Cautions 4 Vehicle Identification Number 5 Wi Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Id INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer
2. 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display sno PT V Door Ajar Pale so pare aq ele Y eau oe ERE dod Gate Ajar SASCAP ss es Fuel Cap Fault LO UE coa yov RED HO ded aC Low Tire Pressure CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the in strument cluster all warnings including Door Ajar and Gate Ajar will only be displayed in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center If Equipped gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Lo tIrE When tire pressure is low the odometer display will toggle between Lo and tIrE for three cycles CHAngE OIL Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds
3. BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system oper ating WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops the Brake Warning Light will light 308 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING WARNING Driving a vehicle with the Brake Warning Light on e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish is dangerous A significant decrease in braking per their effectiveness and may lead to a collision formance or vehicle stability during braking may Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just p
4. 7 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds er as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first N turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 8 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a continuous chime will sound to 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 9 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that the high beam head ma lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 10 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ies ABS The light will tum on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the convent
5. 7 Press the ESC Off switch located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls four times within 20 seconds The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is dis abled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it s previous setting Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for over steering or under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steering or under steering condi tion Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steer or under steer condition e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicl
6. WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by
7. Automatic Transmission CVT If MOPAR CVTF 4 Equipped Manual Transmission If Equipped MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Rear Drive Assembly RDA MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent non synthetic product Power Transfer Unit PTU MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent non synthetic product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Maintenance Schedule 0 440 H Required Maintenance Intervals M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More freguent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfuncti
8. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler Group LLC Copyright 2010 Chrysler Group LLC A o m O c
9. Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the tVR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the e button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only o
10. LIOBPOUS viewed uas HER E ER Ede Pa 400 B Replacement Parts ES ES Se 401 W Dealer Service EE Se ss ee 401 Bl Maintenance Procedures 402 aie ai OI REEN EE a 403 EENS ING OUNCE s aed x v 9 9x 1 4 JUR RR dd 406 O Engme Air Cleaner Filter i ms 2x3 xar emat 406 O Maintenance Free Battery isses he 407 O Air Conditioner Maintenance O Body DUDECOBOIE 25 2a tiurPSRARYODERTS O Windshield Wiper Blades 410 o Adding Washer Fluid 410 HExhaust5ystel 12 934 442 X 95 fv ee 411 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 413 418 0 Cooling System o Brake System D Automatic Transmission CVT I Eotipped 25444046 MERE RES Pur d EUROPE 421 o Manual Transmission If Equipped 422 O Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD 4WD Model cO esaeo ieee vow xev sees d 423 O Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD AWD Models ONIY ou seed 2r e DROS EN ESSE 423 D Appearance Care And Protection From COO ON PE ESRA ER RA PRED EES 424 apr qe rr 429 H Integrated Power Module 429 B Vehicle Storage ellus 433 Mi Replacement Bulbs 433 W Bulb Replacement esee ee mE 434 O Headlamps sa ste o dinde du trit REDE ROES 434 DOG Was ace aie Feud bigs ER DERE d d 434 o Real Tail Turn Signal And Backup Lamp 435 EI license LAMPS 225645 bx do uS ER ORR 435 H Center High Mounted Stoplamp 435 M Fluid Capacities cem ERE RAE 436 W Fluids Lu
11. Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with Uconnect For sales code RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 touch screen radio iPod USB MP3 control feature refer to the separate RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 User s Manual iPod USB MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port located in the center console or glove compartment iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the app
12. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes of corrosion are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near sea coast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 e f insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu Specia
13. The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met 034206938 Power Sunroof Switch 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Openi
14. cator light OFF after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation It will turn the heater and the remaining indicator light OFF after an a maximum of 45 minutes of continuous operation If LOW level heating is selected the system automatically turns the heater and the indicator light OFF after a maximum of 45 minutes of continuous operation NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 WARNING Continued reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates the seat adjusters have latched against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat 030940024 Manual Front Seat Adjustment On m
15. cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button
16. e press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name re
17. even if it occurs before 128 000 miles 208 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Replace the air conditioning filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace rear drive assembly RDA fluid Replace power transfer unit PTU fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 452 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 102 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule H Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 144 000 miles 234 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 136 000 miles 221 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system I
18. ger THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC P for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags if equipped An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This a
19. gt button e Asingle press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or press the VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EME e Press the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 de vice scan mode which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode pressing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previ ous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB
20. mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror 030406198 Power Mirror Control 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left WARNING or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further Mirror Directions information 030410215 When you are finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To use the vanity mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward 030406199 Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Sliding Feature The sun visors may be extended out to provide more coverage of the side glass Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Ucon
21. the Uconnect Phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehi
22. the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved
23. two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The manual transmission clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See your local authorized dealer for service Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e e e e e e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake To avoid contamination from foreign matter or fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Continued moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonge
24. 163 Place the handheld transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to Step 5 Programming A Rolling Code oystem 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 Programming A Rolling Code System At the garage door op
25. 4WD Indicator If Equipped This light indicates the vehicle is in the 4 Wheel Drive mode 20 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 21 OdometerlTrip Odometer Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in Trip mode to reset 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided i should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you shou
26. AN 100268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and car
27. And Child Restraints shoulder belt e Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who NOTE For additional information refer to are older than one year can ride forward facing in the www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web child seats used in the forward facing direction are for site for additional information http www tc gc ca children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a
28. Belt 46 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 46 And Pregnant Women sore ee oe hy ERAS 59 Ca estat 24422260444 BREER es RD S 79 EXIGHOIG 2220 br cmb op es oes see ean 58 Front Seat aie a ee 43 Pedes Bb RES de ded BES 40 IUSDOEHOIT 2923 3 23 oes MERE P HAD 2 Se 85 Pretensioners SS SS SS SS ss 02 Kear et she 393 baw AR ASA uod ig aes 40 o C RA AR N AE E E E ETE 159 Rd GELE Dee bore a XR HERE ES TI 187 Heated SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS se 136 Lia SUD DOE siese w quo d wee dra ER 138 Rear dee RE RE merde dope dors canoe 144 Kear Folding Sedan iea sasies ore RES 144 Seatback Release ee eee 139 El RE EE OE EE NG 159 Security Alarm Theft Alarm v Selection of Oil sa ioi mE CERES 404 Sentry Key Immobilizer need SE UR ten 14 Sentry Key Programming 944 066 ike ke ie ER IR es 16 Sentry Key Replacement 443442444465 EIER RS 15 Service Assistance 2 eee ee 457 a EEEEEEIIILGLIIIIIULIIUIIIILUIILLIUILIDILIUIIILULLUCSLA A LLIGALOIAGIOIdLIIulndeREOAL LIUAAHUUUOOdO OBOoUo04A 0Eu047 INDEX 479 Service Contract us vum RR EUR EG EEG 459 Service Manuals eee 461 Setting Te Clock iss duda dcs d AAR S 222 241 250 Settines Personal ona eco o were be tees eet ae een 215 Shift Lever Override 42 ia wma dese eee ew a eds 391 Shift Speeds Manual Transaxle 295 Shoulder Belts s 22a ER ORR AD SURE m xU T 40 els vide ARE SEE N KO
29. Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the es button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owners Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairi
30. Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information ca
31. Down The driver s door window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Window Lockout Switch LIFTGATE The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCKOUT switch To enable the window con To unlock the liftgate insert the key into the lock and trols press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time turn it to the right manual lock models only The liftgate can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors The central locking unlocking feature if equipped can also be activated from the liftgate key cylinder NOTE The key that is used to start the vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate 2 021906197 Window Lockout Switch 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed NOTE without using the key To open the liftgate sq
32. Ges EA MERS RA RR SARA 146 Lead Free Gasoline SS SS 352 Leaks PUG a2 2432 9 3uRSa i tentari 87 Life of Tires MENTRE 337 itt ate edan speres 2er duci eE RUE E i 35 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 185 Is Bt BUDS qoos us o GEVREESDE DER ERIS 87 433 Erg 87 148 AUDOS 1x23 ay ot ows we oro DEE 66 67 71 85 195 Pl ee a a ee ee ee ee ee 200 Duos dM m 196 Back Up RP Mr 435 Brake Assist Warning a 248 dabo e agds 319 Brake Warming sie nano 0 5 8 ERLA nars 197 Bulb Replacement sre aces EE VRAE aoa 434 e T 180 Center Mounted SIOP eu ecasuus vore den deus 435 Daytime Buis isa Ee MOE ER HR bes 149 Dimmer Switch Headlight 2 226 emn 148 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 319 Engine Temperature Warning 197 Ede Vo MR ERA teas DELE ES UE NE RP 87 p isi ea ooi b ERROR see eas ee 149 206 434 LieddliepE ie sooo vio RES RA ERK ER 148 Heada IS 32 939 X xd eR OPEREER DE 148 Lieb Deam Indicatof sa 3x9 Gee ee ys 196 I stiumenp CIUSIC 2s ose oed REDES 148 lul 4 25 o 4 Rok ou be 5 oS eee eG oe oe 435 Lents On ISemuldet a caos secs ties Hens ewes 149 GOW Fuel waa 39 4055550507 SSeS 195 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 205 Map Keding wie ED RES ARE eet cas 151 Oil Pressure ia ae SAAD RPO END 195 Seat Belt Reminder 196 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 200 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 5 9 200 Ti
33. Ibs 50 kg 2 4L Auto Man with 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Trailer Tow Prep Pack age AHC Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information Trailer And Tongue Weight rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side to Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your of many trailer collisions vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the NS TA TING AND OPERATING 365 Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed opt
34. LEVER OVERRIDE 6 If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Firmly set the parking brake 392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id 2 Remove the shift lever override access cover located 5 Using a small screwdriver or similar tool push and on the right side of the shifter housing hold the override release lever forward 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE With Ignition Key Automatic Transmission e Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck all four Shift Lever Override Access Cover wheels OFF the ground 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position e All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles must be towed on a without starting the engine flatbed truck all four wheels OFF the ground 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393 CAUTION be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an If the vehicle s battery is discharged see Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing aut
35. Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception
36. Security Alarm aede HER MR 17 Tie Down Hooks Cargo sie ue soam re RR Ret 183 Tilt Sieerine COMIN a ees aur va ET TS PTS TUS 156 Tire and Loading Information Placard 326 Tire Identification Number TIN 324 Dre Markings rm 320 Tire Satety Iniormation 64 sesa ceme seses res 320 MCS nona Euro E N ENE SU RO ER 87 330 463 Aging Life of lires aeu ae Re mo he RS 337 Air Pressure soekers HEM HER HEES 330 ei AAR SR eee HE EE EL 339 Chang RE EE RS IRURE PE TS 378 General Information 4 959 934 53S 330 EH opeed e macie seta Fur BA HAS KAR ORDE 392 Inflation Pressures erasa quede pee Far ded 331 es AE OES OE EED BEET 378 LHe Qf Dies 244248452 ban o Sua dest oa da 337 Load Capacily 2444 EER ears AD ftis 326 327 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 341 Pressure Warning Lied sse RR RE 201 Oud ara uon av dre pd vue VE E a 463 Ico 333 Replacement sa gresca ws ooo Prey wee Ee 338 RODOR P 340 U I 320 330 DES uu exu 32 84 2E gut I intu BER 322 ODOW TIOS sea aae ESE ESE DR i 340 aie TB 4445454 45 veces ORR TAREAS 9 9 DPMS sis RD RES SERE S DF dI PE 336 Tread Wear Indicators 2 239 REEDE aan 337 COPAC ODE 2 59 93e 4 eed as orien tes 334 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 364 N INDEX 481 TOWING AA POET HO ET TER AFD OT TEE 360 24 Hour Towing Assistance 112 Disabled Voluel suco uq ad NE ERE e pins 992 foi D D C V C 364 RECHCOHONAL sasagi a est aicut atii e
37. The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Continued axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 Fold Down Speakers If Equipped REAR WINDOW FEATURES When the liftgate is open the speakers can swing down off the trim panel to face rearward for tailgating and other activities Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch located on the center portion of the control lever The control lever is located on the right side of the steering column 3 Fold Down Speakers 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MH NOTE The rear wiper operates in an in
38. UCI 265 CODSDIe RES RE MY S RES RAS RR 179 Contract Service eua ruo RR v NE AP E 459 Coolant Antifreeze leen 436 437 CCOOlHe SIE erris oe RE HOE EER HERE NS 413 A INDEX 469 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 415 Coolant Level Disposal of Used Coolant 416 Drain Flush and Refill 414 IS DOEHDI lt lt 4 esa 4 Gag Got A b ERA ae d ea 417 Points to Remember 416 417 Di de dD oes e RAAR ER ANN RR E BR 416 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 414 Corrosion Protection Cruise Light E UDBDId ES oce V RO EUR dr 179 Customer Assistance een 457 Data Recorder Event ss 339224 EX es 72 Dealer Service leen 401 Defroster Rear Window 186 Defroster Windshield 85 276 277 282 Delay Intermittent Wipers 2 42 x2 RR os 154 Diagnostic System Onboard ees oro 399 Dimmer Switch Headlight aes dee ERES 150 Dipsticks Power MODD segreta edem Dare Sab ees 304 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant gis Mer EE ds 416 Eise OU iss ORR SEED EED ER DS 405 Doo BOOKS siter 3 sp een teats ee PRSE 28 Door Locks Automatic eee 29 Door ODDS AE E uoa REEN EE sd 161 Dowe sucus uc e gon mam se ARBEI ER AE 295 Driver s Seat Back DIE gon Ee EDE bao Cies 199 IINE Qi ER ERROR EER VERS EE ER PARS 302 Electric Remote Mirrors uu cis e RES Rg sees 95 Electrical Power Outlets osica sp um ten 171 Electron
39. Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The side rails and crossbars are designed to carry weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and it should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE Crossbars are offered by MOPAR accessories 3 Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack Load should always be secured to cross bars first with tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only Do not use ratchet ing mechanisms with the tie loops Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION Continued e To prevent damage to the roo
40. VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest could increase the risk of injury in accidents Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an ac
41. WARNING e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable dan DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event 030907533 of a collision and could result in serious injury or pe Active Head Restraint Tilted death NOTE Continued e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Folding Rear Seat WARNING Continued To provide additional storage area each rear seatback can e Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they be folded forward Pull the strap forward to move the are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose seat forward and flat cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed Rear Head Restraints The head restraints in the rear are non adjustable Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for information on Tether routing Folding Rear Seat UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 WARNING Be certain that
42. WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the ignition key in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward until it stops e ook at the instrument cluster to ensure it is in the PARK position wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise dam age to the steering column or shift lever could result You must also press the brake pedal REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle 300 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id DRIVE This range is used for most city and highway driving AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control AutoStick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and
43. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine 294 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator Remember to disconnect the engine block heater pedal cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED Five Speed Manual Transmission WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline 80f7bc4b Shift Pattern Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transmission is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third gear For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light acc
44. Windows If Equipped O Power Window Switches DAuto Down rns 0 Window Lockout Switch W Liftgate ll Occupant Restraints O Lap Shoulder Belts D Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage O Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions o Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 O Energy Management Feature 52 H Event Data Recorder EDR 3 2s ER 72 O Seat Belt Pretensioners 52 O Child Restraints o3 omm O Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR 53 li Engine Break In Recommendations H Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System M oately Tips civ ems HE 4 SE ERG PAPER c REL E d O Iransporting Passengers x uas SKREE DRA 63 El est belt Extender 4 4 sext doen iure Ix S Y ER 58 ET eo EN es 24 O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 59 J Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The D Supplemental Restraint System SRS poni P r 85 in EA AE ET OE REKE 59 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make O Advanced Front Airbag Features 61 Outside Th Venicle iese ori oe RR AR 87 H Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 65 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers
45. YOUR VEHICLE 107 List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook e Press the N button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the VR button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the N button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M
46. a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 14 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the e
47. a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if yo
48. after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves high output radio transmitting equipment This in terference can cause possible loss of Anti Lock brak ing capability Installation of such equipment should e a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end be performed by qualified professionals of the stop e brake pedal pulsations All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer These are all normal characteristics of ABS ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitiga tion ERM Hill Descent Control HDC Hill Start Assist ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 HSA and Electronic Stability Control ESC All sys tems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information Traction Control System TCS This sys
49. and place the key in the ignition 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e f you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door gt 021806188 Child Protection Door Lock Location 021806189 Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged THINGS TO KNO
50. at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire 338 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characte
51. button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will be displayed during this three second window Compass Temperature Audio Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing the outside temperature and the current radio station For additional information regarding the compass refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level This is not resettable NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 continue until the vehicle runs out of
52. button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD R
53. cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNINCG A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 25 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 26 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con 5 trol system ESC has been turned off by the OFF driver 27 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activationl Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN p
54. death Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped NOTE The following messages will display in the EVIC if the The park lamps will turn on and remain on during vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema Remote Start mode turely e For security power window and power sunroof op e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar in the Remote Start mode e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned position before you can repeat the start sequence for a to the ON RUN position third cycle Remote Start Aborted System Fault N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e Fuel lamp turns on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed e The transmission is moved out of PARK e The brake pedal is pressed To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one t
55. disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the GVR button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones e Press the amp butt
56. extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary For information on operating the Rear Defrost refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will c put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are pres ent Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE e Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the outside air position for maximum defogging e The A C will engage automat
57. fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will be dis played based on the current values in the DTE calcula tion and the current fuel tank level Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Pressure Moni toring System TPMS for system operation Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or STARI position Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK automatic transmission or the vehicle is stopped manual transmission Press and release the MENU or DOWN buttons until Personal Settings is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button Use the SELECT button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects English Espanol Deutsch Italiano Francais or NL de pending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language NOTE Uconnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Language Selection in Uconnect phone If Equipped for details 216 UN
58. greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel ON OFF N CANCEL 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady 3 speed and on level ground before press
59. ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 021410235 Three Button RKE Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under
60. increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id seconds will allow the program format type to be se B p 16 Digit Character lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast HER APE Display ME on Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following delde 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or undefined Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classic Rock Cls Rock None N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode
61. inner hood surface UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 8 in 20 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and the fog lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031407547 Multifunction Lever Headlights And Parking Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent to turn on the parking lights Turn the end of the lever to the second detent to turn on the headlights 031407548 Headlight Control N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running Lights lower intensity whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headligh
62. it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the L
63. knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See Owmer s Manual For Further Information 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing INTRODUCTION 5 seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wea
64. label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seatbelts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate Driver Center Passenger d CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock FirstRow N A N A AIR ALR Second Row ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable ALR e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR 1 To
65. located on the steering wheel ment cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B The following displays can be reset or changed Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last e Trip A reset ru ope Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEE The EVIC consists of the following ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 041035271 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC System Status Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Compass Heading Outside Temperature Display Trip Computer Functions Uconnect phone Displays if equipped Audio Mode Display Tire Pressure Monitor TPM UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 The system allows the driver to select information by MENU Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the MENU button to scroll wheel MENU through the main menus Fuel Economy Warn ings Timer Units System Personal Settings or to exit sub menus COMPASS Button Press and release the COMPASS button to D display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature or to exit sub menus SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for a
66. not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the plate into the buckle until you hear a click buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Pad p q e i T ee a b d i 022607726 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE ST
67. number of reasons A child or others could be brake before attempting to move the vehicle seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away before driving failure to do so can lead to brake from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped failure and a collision with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 CAUTION If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunc tion is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately
68. pedal is pressed to the floor e If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is locked rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the key Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Tip Start Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it 202 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 sec onds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission canno
69. penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately Nee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam Cooling System age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis motion connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic or steam from your radiator If you see or hear testing or for prolonged periods during Very rough steam coming from under the hood do not open idle or malfunctioning operating conditions the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset
70. prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely STARTING AND OPERATING 305 y X E N Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate 306 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking
71. previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds md when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop 3swai Y when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver 054903773 that caused the ESC activation U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load ed dards Code TIN R The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure eoe Electronic Stability Control ESC is off 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades OFF ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall precedi
72. s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of a battery is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal d Separating Case Halves 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 021432709 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together NOTE If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The sy
73. should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order t
74. sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause
75. that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 461 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department immedi ately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment plea
76. the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space be tween you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Continued 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle A
77. the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to move closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user
78. the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located in the reading light General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE
79. the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is no
80. to maintain the rocking motion without spin ning the wheels is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con trol or Electronic Stability Control ESC turn the system OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle NN WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 391 CAUTION WARNING e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener tween DRIVE 1st gear and REVERSE do not spin ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive even failure of the axle and tires A tire could train damage may result explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring SHIFT
81. unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors liftgate and ignition switch for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the interior switches for door locks are disabled The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals the horn will sound the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the parking lights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed To Arm The System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door LOCK switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and close all doors 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN or the power door locks are un locked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm After approximately 16 seconds the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed To Disarm The System Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter or insert the key into the
82. vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 022607492 022607497 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHRat 1 Downward Movement a comfortable position 2 Rearward Movement 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 3 1 AA 022607757 ak 022607494 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mecha AHR In Reset Position Eia EE EE NOTE 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the into the back decorative plastic half Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seatbelts This feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seatbelts are fastened BeltAlert triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph 8 km h The reminder sequence lasts for 96 seconds or until the respective seatbelts are fas tened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Re minder Light remains illuminated until front belts ar
83. will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped gt I e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped mm e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc These selections can only be made while playing a DVD VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped VESTM Lock Locks out rear VESTM remote controls if equipped VES CH1 CH2 Allows the
84. your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil or refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should b
85. 2 9 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 10 Hazard Warning Flasher 11 ESC OFF Switch If Equipped 12 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER NU BOF FR 101 8 P10 040335396 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge Fuel Door Reminder When the ignition switch is in the ON RUN lt position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located 2 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 3 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the KA Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition
86. 2 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 D3 tags D3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the devic
87. 3 8934 5 357 lelie AP 356 oi a AREA RERO EE EE EI EER 429 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 161 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 472 INDEX NEE Id Gasoline Fuel siek EER ERA REDE A de 436 Gasoline Clean Air eee 352 Gasoline Reformulated 352 Gauges Coolant Tem Derdb le 62 ER dnce y N xus 200 Filel EE ARE EE EE OE EE 194 Ode sus SELA HER DRAKE m S 203 Tachometer s 2 dur 6546 26 CASU RE EE AS 197 Gear Select Lever Override 391 ec ARE ee Ge BS Be one ee NN 298 General Information e 253 dv mv rums 17 125 351 General Maintenance lesen 402 Ee ETE Bet panacea 428 Gross Axle Weight Rating 361 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 359 360 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 97 Hazard Warning Pall sie 3 EER RES EE RO 376 Head Restraints lle 141 Legge nis tou44 72454 66s oe on S eee oe PES 434 Bl FP bor jo bee Bees ee es 427 Piet DOSUL eus Hae aaah n gan yee dod ad 150 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 150 Posse RP Cos bees te et ae 150 oe RA EE RE EE NE 434 v Ud M sie ERAS AD HORE OER HE ee 148 Heated Mirrors SS SS SS eee ae 96 Heated Seats iese we ERAS EE deen RE 136 Heater ART OP AE NE EE eo IF 274 Heater Engine Block saw cus wars veo Bae DERE 293 Hill Descent Control 0 208 313 Hill Start Assist SS SS se 314 Hitches Tie det TOE s cree rh dns
88. 35 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service Mounting Spare Tire station Lol 060633619 NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385 8 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and WARING stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard the means provided stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have NARNING the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi WARNING ately A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully 10 Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required 9 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions 386 WHAT TO DO IN E
89. 4547 nA OE RES PTS d 181 Cigo Ated Features qa 4 3 4558 PS ER DR ERES 180 Cargo Compartment Er 2547 180 468 INDEX NEE Id Coco Digit siene OER eee te aes em 180 Cargo Load PlOO uoo EE 654 04 RR RR oe dope deed 183 Caroo lie DONIS uoa dors 8 23 5 E EE SUP OS 183 Cellular Phone een 97 274 Center High Mounted Stop Light 435 Chans TNC AA ok OR oo ee eee OE 339 Chansmnne A Flat Ie sonar hea DRA HS OP 378 Cham Tie IUS saradas Es DEL RABE D eens 322 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Er T Tm 400 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 83 CHECKS odlely A 83 CIC Rose osse sacs ek He RR S a BL ades 73 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 78 Child Restraint with Automatic Belts 76 Child Salefy LOCKS os d 4 9194 i EE Ge de ERAS 92 sieke cpu s o PX REPRE IR Eq UPS SES 80 Clean Air Gasoline ss s RESO ooo ae PS eg 202 Cleaning Wheels i224 5s dawg ee Robe HORE Es 426 Climate Ono caret eaten E Abe HAS dona RU 274 God PD 222 211 250 Sie 2 ance ER ES TOR EO EE 419 Clutch El CREE TOTIS RETTULIT 419 Com Holler e ELE sees SEGUE URSUS es 179 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 273 Compact opdie lie sies wee uus Gye a ee 334 COMPOS CT 208 Compass Calibration ead a oa UP iN oa een 218 Compass Vatiand sses a a backs HER KAR EROS 219 Connector OCI bees erer AR GASSE OAAR SE es 265 Universal Consumer Interface
90. A U IGUAAUA APaGAUu L Uu INDEX 467 OVOME us sues F5 SES OR ACE CR 377 Selection Of Lubricant 421 vinti PPP REDE aes 298 Special Additives i s oa ecdesiae ees 422 AUO KE a wae om Ase Be eh ee a ees 300 B rillar LOCAUON sesse 4009 p ES SA Ge Ede HERE 326 Dattery 143 42449 a 9r 440 2046 EER and eed 407 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Belts Seat ounce Hae Bor cot Mose Se Oa rk AU REN 85 Body Mechanism Lubrication 409 Brake Assist Syste iss cade ees tha RED wees 311 Drake Fluid osse RS HE HEAD BR HARE RR 438 Die SIE van 9 8 3 obo RE CERREN 307 418 Anti Lock ABS EES Se 308 311 Master Cylinder o neve 4 ba PORE RR 419 PakO 225993 oe eee DOER ES E OPES 305 Wart Light s oe GEREED ER ok BG De 5 197 Brake EK NE ooo EE ERIS KORE bd ERA b d 305 Brake Transmission Interlock 297 Drakes 6 aig ee ees EA EES BROOD AE ES 307 418 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 82 Bulb Replacement PP de nes se 433 434 Bulbs Dio b 22 a OES RT Acti ard yeast 87 433 Calibration Compass siwwe 4445 Sonde qr P EROR 218 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 436 Capaciics PUIG me e sees vote umm es ue S EI 436 Caps Filler TERE ETE bee EL EET OOK 306 OUGEMCING oe 32372 SR RR Rabe bs 397 398 405 Power DIOS adyeucuman tage E A ROS ER De 304 Car Washes cos sa Pv SR SEE IE debug SEE 424 Carbon Monoxide Warning 84 355 Cargo Area COVE 46484
91. AINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD AWD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD AWD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained be tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Frequency Of Fluid Change
92. ARK position when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed before attempting to move the lever 298 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Gear Ranges Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range NEUTRAL positions into another gear range Always apply the parking brake first and then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle 051006184 Shift Lever PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 299 CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the steering
93. ARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in an accident The belt forces allow the belt to retract fully won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but WARNING across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your n
94. BS Exterior Bulb No Low Beam Headlamp H11 High Beam Headlamp 9005 Front Park Turn Signal Lamp 7444NA Front Side Marker Lamp oo es ied es W5W Front POS Lampe oen bio du ek ER ORE RR On deu 8 PSX24W Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHM oars ep AE ES TE EE LED Assembly Serviced at Authorized Dealer TE E NE LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Turn Lamp 7440NA WY21W Amber Backup Lamp 7440NA W21W Crystal Licne LAMP sos ag WP tered d OR d ecdesia d WOW Rear Tail Stop Lamp 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE BULB REPLACEMENT Fog Lamps Headlamps 1 Access lamp through the lower fascia cutout 1 Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the 2 Remove electrical connector from bulb headlamp 3 Remove bulb from housing 2 Reach into the engine compartment and pull the red lock out at the green connector 3 Remove green connector from back of bulb by pulling straight back 4 Twist the bulb to the left 5 Pull bulb outward from assembly NOTE These are halogen bulbs Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb life Real Tail Turn Signal And Backup Lamp 1 Remove the two push pins from the taillamp housing Ba LZ rss 2 Grasp the taillamp and pull firmly to disengage the lamp from the aperture pane
95. Con continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning troller System serviced as well Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any airbag system service If your seat including your Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag syst
96. DERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Auto Lock Doors at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 km h Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped manual transmission or the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position automatic transmission Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection RKE Unlock Driver s Door 1st When Driver s Door 1st is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button and require a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors When Re mote Unlock All Doors is selected all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until Driver s Door 1st or All Doors appears to make your selection Flash Lamps with Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn with lock feature selected Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display unt
97. De gen eed MEER SERS E Ee 94 REVIEW 224 bars ua HERETO ESE DEE x 93 VAND AAR OE EE EE eee 4 eae ded OT Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Presstite Dystem sa cy duced ose oo 341 MODE ES renies dar Yeu Ep OE Re EC Os 401 460 MIDE ETDE cserepes eetri kdi Ri 353 Multi Function Control Lever 148 New Vehicle Break In Period 82 Occupant Restraints sis sod aos mde en d 37 65 69 Occupant Restraints Sedan 62 63 65 68 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 352 476 INDEX NEE Id Don seek EO KORE ERSTES 203 io M r 201 203 OIE hanee Medies ss d 9sp hehe Rr br penes 213 Oil Change Indicator Reset lt 4a mus eek Hg os 219 CUL BEBO 244 024 48265 case v A G09 He 403 436 Soc sasie GAN ORDER OR He a4 AS 436 Chon e EEVA sons der a Es ee ERU OR aban 404 Check 236444044 5999 8 2 Eb d S es 403 Disposal sesde Ee ee KERE PUPPES 405 Iz A 406 ledenuiis Uon LOBO dari acinsne mad ew E Vend 404 Materials Added to 2 445454 644 0 deus 405 Recommendation leen 404 436 PEC 422 0645 OR VORNE ERREUR SCHON 405 buco P Pt 405 Onboard Diagnostic System 399 400 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 161 Operator Manual Owner s Manual D guru A 300 Ovedie Db USE vows E a qb E PRED RES 200 376 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 461
98. E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 16 000 miles 26 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 8 000 miles 13 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 444 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and e
99. ER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts AREA Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and WARNING using a seat belt properly e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Continued 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have
100. ERS eRe OR OE 67 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 285 lae MA sis ieee eg SERE ca eas 87 195 435 Snow Chains Tire Chains LL 339 Snow Dies is x92 5 395229184 29 497 eae 340 PE Tie gratas i tape RUS N os 334 335 379 Specifications MET ARE ONE AE EA NEE ON 404 Speed Control Cruise Control 158 201 wjesse on Mr 195 gt de lt 4 LE PERE HO TEE ETES 291 Automatic Transmission 291 Engine Fails to Stait oos SR tense dees 293 Manual Transmission 04 291 ROMO spa sass Xu iR eure Pd ware a Ga 25 Starine Procedures asb RE RE Reb e 29 Steering POW ache 3 SE N HEES EE s 303 304 Ti GOT Ais os ae ab OE DR ER D teas 156 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 272 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System doni d PC 272 v P ae sg 6 eas oye TER EE 177 433 OCE DI uasa da A dr ER EE ae eee bees 177 Orge VENICE pica etna E ai e RR Re os HE 284 vine deels PE 390 DUN ROOT s sae bas MED og Gene de Des ane ore 167 Duin Visor EXTENSION sas up bre ERROR doe E EE v os 97 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 59 oyek tisie dos ns ou ea EER ERROR System Remote Starting 480 INDEX NEE Id Tachometer sae Reis sk R S ERE EEG 197 jd P TE EE l 435 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 278 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 200 377 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 78 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Theft System
101. GINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 A new engine may consume some oil during its first few WARNING Continued thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people preted as an indication of difficulty riding in these areas are more likely to be seri SAFETY TIPS ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your Transporting Passengers NEV
102. Hon Module 20 Amp 115V AC Inverter Yellow 20 Amp Cigar Lighter 1 Yellow Red Steering Control Sat 10 Amp Instrument Cluster ellite Radio Hands Red Free Phone Radiator Fan 30 Amp Ignition Off Draw Green 15 Amp Dome Lamp 30 Amp Ignition Off Draw Lt Blue Sunroof Rear Wiper Green Motor 10 Amp Wireless Control Red Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fus Fuse Fuse Fuse 18 40 Amp Auto Shutdown Relay 15 Amp Auto Shutdown Relay Green Lt Blue 19 20 Amp Radio Amplifiers 10 Amp Airbag Control Mod Yellow Red ule 15 Amp Radio 10 Amp Airbag Control Lt Blue Red Module Occupant 1 Classification Module Hot Car No Fuse Re quired 20 Amp Heated Seat If Yellow Equipped 10 Amp Headlamp Washer Red If Equipped 30 Amp Auto Shutdown Relay Pink 15 Amp Auto Shutdown Relay Lt Blue 4 15 Amp Power Sunroof Lt Blue 25 10 Amp Heated Mirror If Red Eguipped 2 10 Amp Intrusion Module Red __ Siren If Equipped 22 10 Amp Heating AC Red Compass 23 2 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Cavity Cartridge Mini Description CAUTION Fuse Fuse 33 10 Amp J1962 Conn e When installing the IPM cover it is important to Powertrain Control ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully Module latched Failure to do so may allow water to get Antilock BrakeValve into the IPM and possibly result in an electric
103. INGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head 5 Sit back in the seat Slide the regular latch plate up the restraint webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around Z your lap 6 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 022606149 Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt 4 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the mini latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a click Connecting Mini Latch To Buckle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 7 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your 8 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight will withdraw any slack in the belt pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident 9 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle P 022610239 Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 10 To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for storage insert the regular latch plate into the black button on the top of the mini buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch p
104. INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between and Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the button to turn recirculate off If its sunny set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn the air conditioning on If its cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 2 COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and sd then turn the air t TY conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 646 oS the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near rf If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and d In very cold weather pim if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATI
105. Indicator Light will then go out NOTE Refer to Electronic Brake Control System Electronic Stability Control ESC in Starting and Op erating for further information ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 303 They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increa
106. L tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr 1 O Q2 Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 324 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing its L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only req
107. LL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third t
108. M General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation s This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system w
109. M and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the st
110. MERGENCIES CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment below the air intake duct To access the battery remove the air intake duct by turning the two finger screws located on the radiator support Air Intake Finger Screws WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery Positive Battery Post 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the batte
111. NDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current CAUTION list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line e Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any supported device anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufactur e To exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode pha er s guidelines e LIST button The LIST button will display the top Placing items on the iPod or external USB device level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn or connections to the iPod or external USB device the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be in the vehicle can cause damage to the device selected and press the TUNE control knob This will and or to the connectors display the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired WARNING track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device AES IST sub menu levels are available on this system Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is device while driving Failure to follow this warning another shortcut button to the genre listing on your could result in an accident audio device EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be strea
112. NG CONTENTS li Starting Procedures 291 o Manual Transmission If Equipped 291 H Automatic Transmission If Equipped 291 E NODUDLODBUNE 2 2 999 95 oes e POR ERES 292 O Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or x i eta eee eek one eee ae eee 292 oO If Engine Fails To Start 5 22292 99 ax eed 293 BL ATIS AOE tas see HER CREE ER 299 ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 293 lll Manual Transmission If Equipped O Five Speed Manual Transmission oO Recommended Shift Speeds El Downs MIUNO sae as He R RE R BR Redes W Automatic Transmission If Equipped O Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock VSCOM Pr D Brake Transmission Interlock System siet BAAR ORE IG Cr 288 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id lal AutoStick If Equipped 300 3 Brake Assist System BAS 311 Ed Detail PT 300 O Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 912 O General Information ce she Rete 301 3 Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped 313 ll Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped 302 3 Hill Start Assist HSA Manual E On Road Driving Tips sos san OER RR ERR 302 SIGESIROSIOD a deridet s M Power T 303 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 316 O Power Steermg Fluid Check 43223 304 pe percer rie et me Light 319 wi OE X E Tire Safety Information 320 aM Brake System auus ieee diss ce oto ed 307 3Tire M
113. NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 115 Volt 150 Watt AC power inverter is located on the front of the center console for added convenience This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will excee
114. OCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON There is a standard 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet located or ACC position Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug in the instrument panel for added convenience This into the outlet for use To preserve the heating element power outlet can power cellular phones electronics and do not hold the lighter in the heating position other low power devices NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used 3 CAUTION e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Continued 034606144 12 Volt Power Outlet 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Continued e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the ar fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty ns VOE DE ENT i 034636797 Power Outlet Fuse Location
115. OW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup e e Y It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malf
116. Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNINCG Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Your motorized door or
117. R is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment c
118. RE a 285 Eie ed issues ke Se ee EE 406 437 Flashers AA OR OR AT AE N ER OE oe 376 Hazard Ware censor REEDE HER AO oe 4 376 D EEEEEILEIILIIIIIGUIIIIIILIULLILIIUIILLLILILLSIII LL UHI LELALIL ELIT eULLI UAL AGAGGGUOGTOEIU INDEX 471 Tu io ses 2445 cass PX 87 195 435 Flooded Engine Starting u s RD aoc ririri 293 Pid Capa les 4 4444 60 45 Fee See HOE 436 Fluid Leaks 0s s4 lt 0 5 08 RR ewww EE 87 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 422 OWE SlCCHING s gure aut EL DRAERS os 304 Fluid Brake 2221 44 wa 6406 dianid 438 JU A MPRTKFEPRTTTIQUTITOUICTIRI OT E 437 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 437 ek NG 24685 ue ess VOS ORE Pa 149 206 434 Folding Rear DERE sis 23e d a SEER ERA daw ees 144 Folding Rear Seat Sedan x hok mmc s 144 Four Wheel Drive SE 302 oco M CL 302 Four Wheel Drive Operation 302 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 224224 t EE ORDER RS 390 Duel 1 2259 25 49S eet ee eee 352 437 n 565464665 25 MOERAS HERE i 356 nsi TP OR YE eu es hays 354 E rui P M 436 oud piece ee EE EE EE SENS 352 Eai g2eeane eye foe gace ae 353 Piller Cap GaS Cap serras adda ints utia 356 Eo oii EEE E ce ees 352 EA EE OE EE on Se 194 ma RESESSIE OE TE ET OE 195 Materials Added vou eye arg DY ER HER RED EE 354 Menal Pm 353 ER PEDI M 352 ROguiremMmenlS 25444544 tha ad MEd RARR 332 TOUS Capaci sw eaa sgo a ea e HOS ER Do 436 Fuel System Calon is ee X 343
119. RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that but
120. STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage actuated brakes When towing a trailer eguipped with before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic Information in Starting and Operating for the brake controller is not required roper inspection procedure POP E E Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire 2 000 Ibs 907 kg replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 369 WARNING Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Your authorized dealer offers a trailer wiring harne
121. Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR 360 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier suspension compo nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all
122. VEHICLE MNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Id 3 Closing Sunroof Express 169 3 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode A Pinch Protect Feature ues 6 ot oe N de 169 O Venting Sunroof Express 169 LH 5 nshade Operation osse ee ES nbd s 169 EL Wind BUITeUfle usos SUE LARR es be eS DO 170 O Sunroof Maintenance isses dans 170 O Ignition Off Operation s sese Pew oes 170 Bl Electrical Power Outlets leeren L2 W Power Inverter If Equipped 174 ie EE EA TT OE AE N 176 ee T ees 177 XO Glove Compartment And Storage Bin 177 H Door Storage Bl Console Features ll Cargo Area Features 0 Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Flashlight H Cargo Cover O Removable Load Floor O Cargo Tie Down Loops ir ww sow cone s 3 Fold Down Speakers If Equipped ll Rear Window Features O Rear Window Wiper Washer O Rear Window Defroster ll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 178 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dim
123. VIC Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the EVIC messages For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 30 Hill Descent Indicator If Equipped The symbol illuminates is armed when the 2 AWD Lock switch is activated and the trans mission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE position Off Road Mode MINI TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED The Mini Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster and features a driver interactive trip information and temperature display NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Control Buttons 040834255 Mini Trip Control Buttons STEP Button Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to scroll through sub menus i e Temperature Trip Func tions Odometer Trip A Trip B NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 RESET Button Trip Odometer ODO To reset the display shown turn the ignition switch to the This display shows the distance traveled since the last ON position then press and hold the RESET button reset Press and release the STEP button on the instru
124. W and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names n nm e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files
125. W BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED Power Window Switches The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all the door windows There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which oper ate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended 021906196 Power Window Switch Location Auto
126. Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 NOTE e If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver s door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors
127. YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 463 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak trac
128. a complete explanation of the available ESC modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped This system maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off road driving situations HDC will auto matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to between 4 mph 7 km h and 6 mph 9 km h depending on terrain The system is activated by placing the vehicle in Off Road mode and placing the shift lever in LOW or REVERSE Refer to Safe Off Road Driving in Start ing and Operating for further information When HDC is properly enabled the Decent Control Light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated aC e HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only activate when the vehicle is descending a hill It will not activate on level ground If desired HDC can be fully deactivated by putting the vehicle into ESC Full Off mode This is done by pressing and holding the ESC n EE 314 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Off button for five seconds Refe
129. after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the sched uled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 24 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of I v an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors emissions engine and automatic trans mission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas
130. age is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbut
131. ake another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCRO
132. al embed system failure Headlamp Washer The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated Control Smart Glass may result in a dangerous electrical system over If Equipped load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it 25 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater indicates a problem in the circuit that must be Natural If Equipped corrected Antilock Brake Pump When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Front Header Lamps eas aire ee eem T578 Center Dome Lampe ee cu rensas p ted oe EE es 15 9 Rear Cargo Lamp Flashlight 8 A3SLF LIGHTS BUL
133. al inspection of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in What To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the restraint To lower the head restraint press the push head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head button located at the base of the head restraint and push restraint to move the head restraint away from your downward on the head restraint head dem 030907490 022607494 Push Button Active Head Restraint Normal Position For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 e n the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information
134. all Features osis ER ares 107 HOutside Mirror Driver Side i esae EG 94 El Uconnect Phone Features i s 20242024 110 O Outside Mirror Passenger Side 94 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 115 ELI ower MUTO orde ice e piotr irurita 95 H Things You Should Know About Your 7 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 96 Dconmect c TRONE e ss x e Erw ERE enres 117 J Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 97 O General Information 128 ll Voice Command If Equipped 128 O Sun Visor Sliding Feature 97 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie O Voice Command System Operation 128 O Folding Bear Seal uus OS e p db RS RSS 144 EG Ode S sa Se d qo P PI ES 129 O Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped 145 O Voice Training xeu us od tee de EER N Pee 133 M To Open And Close The Hood 146 hc AP RAE Ib ETC 148 D Power Seats If Equipped 134 El Multif nclon Lever a ausa vrbe re RS 148 o Heated Seats If Equipped 136 o Headlights And Parking Lights 148 O Manual Front Seat Adjustment 197 B Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 149 o Manual Seat Height Adjustment If O Lights On Reminder aa puces 3o de eo 4 149 eiye o o ua sci ME N eas ee ce 138 7 Fog Lights If Equipped eie 149 an Es EE tart i EL Turp OE NS s dace Sa eae ALS OES Ran re 150 O Driver s Seatback Recline s fads ad pp te
135. alve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor 344 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System IN This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your veh
136. an non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or micro
137. an read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants And Child Restraints There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and w
138. arkings ccccuceeeeeeees 320 EE EE it eue is O Tire Identification Number TIN 324 Bl Electronic Brake Control System 310 Eie Teminoloey And Definitions x ax nacen 325 OE EG ELE GER ER ga inn O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 326 OB Traction Control System TCS 311 B Tires General Information 330 NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 289 El lite Pie sie 21 9539 R49 treener HANS 330 Gl Tire Inflation Pressures v susce ct eh buy a y 331 o Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 332 ORadial Piy lines vec eux IS sea e en oye os 333 O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped 909 O Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 334 oO Full Size Spare 1f Equipped vsu 95 335 O Limited Use Spare If Equipped 335 DL Dre Opie SE See EES RE EE ge SE 336 E Tread Wear Indicators ss dar 929444 49s 337 EDLMO OE Vie siese otek obs be 8 EE RR E 337 E Replacement Tires s a sceau pure 23 ee es 338 W Tire Chains esu OES EE N NE OG 339 Snow Tires AE TO EE EE 340 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 340 ll Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 341 Ease Vel os an Ere pe Race as EN DE 344 D Premium System If Equipped 347 O General Information N Fuel Requirements 2 O And 24L Engine xx vy de xxr 8 352 O Reformulated Gasoline 952 O Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 353 D E 85 Usage I
139. arstieeoices 274 Air Conditioning Filter 32s vascos port a 285 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 408 409 Air Conditioning System 274 278 408 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 286 Air Pressure Tires 0 00000000 ee 331 Cur A P i 59 68 Airbag Deployment au v oos oss oes GEE ue iadi 69 PDAS Lid amp hs ys 5534 58 oe RR 66 67 71 85 195 Airbag Waintenance oh was Roe Ee ec eee ted os gl ADAT OE peres HEER Bob eae RR RE 62 65 67 68 Airbag Window Side Curtain 63 65 68 Alarm OE ii P 200 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio 237 262 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 308 Anti Lock Warning Light aude gus ES va 196 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 414 436 437 CApaCiles cane descri ween pee eres Rede d 436 Di posd P 416 Appeardince Care as a EET BEA b CER RUE SAKE 424 Assistindo TOWING sos ne aca iod aos cage ee E os di Automatic Dimming Mirror 3a xo 9 625 6 Ese 93 Automatic Door Locks SS SS 29 31 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 278 Automatic Transaxle 12 291 296 377 421 Fluid Level Check sss 422 Interlock Sy Stem seirer etki eK EREA 297 a EEEEELLIIULILILIIIULIIULIILIIILLIIIILILLUICILUOLLLLLLLUL UILALLUTOLL LOdALLILLZGIuAIAAG
140. art of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e RES is asingle CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time displa
141. at belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC are located above the side windows The trim covering the side airbags is labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB to provide enhanced pro tection for an occupant during a side impact The Supple mental Seat Mounted Side Airbags are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 e Instrument Panel Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output e Driver Advanced Front Airbag appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors e Knee Impact Bolster e Pa
142. ate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all 2 collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint
143. ay for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure EVIC Functions e Compass Temperature Audio e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty DTE Elapsed Time e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Personal Settings 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id To Reset The Display Pressing and holding the SELECT button once will clear the function currently being displayed Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the SELECT
144. bbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out board positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment never install LATCH compatible child NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 seats such that two seats share a common lower anchor age If you are installing LATCH compatible child re straints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing The Child Restraint System for typical installation instruc tions 022610332 Rear Seat LATCH Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor a
145. ber with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the amp VR button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VR button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the GVR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you
146. book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously
147. bricants And Genuine Parts 437 EEUE oase BEE hoes teagan eee eee ee d 437 CASSIS 34544 KERR KUR ees ee ea ee 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L WE i 070339986 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Coolant Pressure Cap 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Integrated Power Module Fuses 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 019 i 070339986 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Coolant Pressure Cap 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Integrated Power Module Fuses N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other informati
148. buie EN EE EER EE N eed 424 Fanie e ses 30999 BAAR eee Re ds S ee 22 Parkie Bike 239 3o ide EER AE e oS 305 Passio Hie Ee aa itd see d xc v Para Sg ee es 150 Personal els esisi 5 aes d AE Road EE 215 Vets er RIA EE e 82 Phone Cellular leen 97 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 97 Placard Tire and Loading Information 326 Power Porlock 1ugdeguyidw3 ERR RIES EDE 29 ion P C Jo Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet TA vc PC AAR ae ER EE N 303 304 DUPDFODI A644 p50 DOSEER SMEER ER oe 167 Transter DE ase ERD ED EE HAD BRAAI EE 423 N INDEX 477 WINGOWS 25655624 ET ES EE OE 99 Power Steering FIUId is ie Ra Re RA deme ge d 438 Power Iranse ler Wit 4 6628 dei AE rep SR aasi 423 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 59 Preparation Tor Jacking sis esaet fa cod ee aod 9 9 Pretensioners vod AUC de HS 92 Programmable Electronic Features 216 Radial Piy lies 4 suce a oe RY KAREE ERG n iden 333 Iro tog Mors uto ro M DD T 274 Rear Axle Differential sss 423 ear Dive AssemD y as 29 979 5 mi oer ates a 423 Kear Liteate Sedan aoo 343b exe sEi9iqgx4 yw 35 Rear edP FON voos s 8 ma edo ERREUR ROS aw RO 144 Rear Window Defroster 186 Rear Window Features so ks eR E RE EE 185 Rear Wiper Washer xa ie RS CR RSIRERERSEES 185 Recorder Event Data llle yy Recreational TOWNE i233 3 29 RS isp eR HERES 372 Ref
149. by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules for filter service intervals 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR
150. can e The use of fuel additives which are now being kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as sold as octane enhancers is not recommended a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the Most of these products contain high concentra engine running for an extended period If the tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine performance problems resulting from the use of running for more than a short period adjust the such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the manufacturer the vehicle Continued NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 356 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable WARNING Continued over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected surface every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is behind the fuel filler
151. can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either press the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod9 USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press the VR button and say Next Track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say Previous Track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt
152. ccess to main menus sub menus or to select a per 041035449 sonal setting in the setup menu EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EE DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the sub menus V When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime after 1 mile 1 6 km of distance travelled Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime e Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle not in PARK automatic transmission or vehicle is in motion manual transmission Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more doors open with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more doors open with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Gate Ajar with a single chime Headlamps or Park Lamps On Key In Ignition Check TPM System NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Engine Oil Change Indicator System If Equipped Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC displ
153. ce message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit MEDIA CENTER 230 REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042040029 Media Center 230 REO Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pr
154. ce the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary T Replace the air conditioning filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C O C O O O G G C L L LI L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 450 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Ins
155. cident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain ty
156. cle is not in motion e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the vm button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
157. cles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the right To unlock the door turn the key to the left Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Key In lgnition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition the power door locks will not lock and Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will not function SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start t
158. cognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 e Numbers must be spoken in single digits 8007 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred e You can say O letter O for 0 zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e n a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected
159. ct vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the left side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial ti
160. cted the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Display Units In The EVIC odometer and Uconnect gps system units can be changed between English and Metric 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until ENGLISH or METRIC appears to make your selection Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the Uconnect system are confirmed Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and t
161. d braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis sion Automatic Transmission CVT If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid which has been formulated with special metal to metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid will cause belt slip and result in a com
162. d this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually unplug the device and plug it in again To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter 115 Volt Power Outlet WARNING To avoid serious injury or death e Do not use a three prong adaptor e Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 WARNING Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not touch with wet hands e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers e Close the lid when not in use vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an battery even more quickly Only use these inter electric shock and failure mittently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with ee accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw driven a sufficient length of time to allow the power from the
163. dden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Mist Feature TILT STEERING COLUMN Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe This feature allows you to tilt the steering column to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a upward or downward The tilt control handle is located passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the on the left side of the steering column below the turn wipers will continue to operate signal lever Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Push the lever up to lock the steering column firmly in place 031507504 Mist Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death i Tilting Steering Column Control 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds
164. de is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate ERR we 042305232 Media Center 130 RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set t
165. device or press the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable e During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backward counterclockwise to get to the track faster e In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device 4 e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts 270 UNDERSTA
166. door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Fuel Filler Door NS TA TING AND OPERATING 357 CAUTION WARNING Continued e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and Federal fire regula tions and may cause the MIL to turn on e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling es 5 e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near e Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the click This is an indication that cap is properly tight tank is being filled ened Continued e If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled 358 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If t
167. downloaded phonebook is avail able for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone also allows the user to download entries one at a time from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the amp button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept a single phonebook entry from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to
168. downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Automatic ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission CVT and or the engine from overspeed Changes down will only happen at minimum engine speed to prevent stall Ing Operation NOTE AutoStick is not functional until the CVT warms up in cold weather AutoStick operation is activated in the DRIVE position by moving the shift lever side to side Moving the shift lever to the side will activate AutoStick and shift up to the next higher manual ratio unless you are already operating in or near Overdrive in which case sixth gear ratio will be selected In like manner moving the shift lever to will activate AutoStick and shift to the next lower manual ratio After AutoStick is activated the manual ratio selected is displayed in the transmission ratio display and tipping the shift lever to the or direction will cause an upshift or downshift by one ratio NN STARTING AND OPERATING 301 AutoStick Is Deactivated By holding the shift lever to momentarily When the shift lever is shifted out of DRIVE When in sixth position touching the shift lever to the right When heavy Anti Lock Brake System ABS applica tion is detected Genera
169. e button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 After you are finished adding an entry into the phone
170. e defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 sec onds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key re moved 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle
171. e fastened The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seatbelts If a front seatbelt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will chime as a single notification and illumi nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON RUN or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt at least three times within 10 s
172. e if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel EH us TL ki Tt Uo uam TERT i LH 4 i fy Magi yf a suat re Emu OW me m ee P NONE NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions WARNINCG Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Continued WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381 CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on WARNING Continued e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic locations other than those indicated in the Jacking e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are Instructions for this vehicle securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing
173. e so be sure they have been turned second detent off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS XX The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Fea tures in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 031409884 Map Reading Lights NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted 036407502 Wiper Washer Control Lever Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the
174. e child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat ing LATCH compatible child seats having flexible we
175. e cover into one of the two notches located in the rear trim panels With one of the cover ends installed push inward on the opposite end and install it into the same notch location of the rear trim panel 035406965 Rear Trim Notches 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Using the handle pull the cover toward you and guide WARNING the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides of the rear trim panel In a collision a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle Cargo Cover Guides UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Removable Load Floor Cargo Tie Down Loops The cargo area load floor is removable and can be There are four D rings installed in the cargo area for washed with mild soap and water securing cargo Cargo Load Floor 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e Cargo tie down loops are not safe anchors for a e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers
176. e having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the v
177. e is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING e The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous mannet which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has three available operating modes for four wheel drive equipped vehicles and two available operating modes for two wheel drive equipped vehicles Full On Four Wheel Drive Models Or On Two Wheel Drive Models This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off or ESC Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off Four Wheel Drive Models Or On Two Wheel Drive Models This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light w
178. e of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Adding Washer Fluid The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 WARNING into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri Commercially available windshield washer solvents cation or oil change Replace as required WARNING are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system information or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged
179. e oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 80 000 miles 130 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104 000 miles 169 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EM 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 449 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Repla
180. e s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042340030 Media Center 130 RES RSC UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you m
181. e steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once A Month e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN id At Each Oil Change Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following e Change the engine oil filter pages for the required maintenance intervals e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the manual transmission fluid level CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A N T
182. e vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freez ing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement
183. e wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performanc
184. eck Push the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that fits you best NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position 022607727 Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions The second row center lap shoulder belt features a three point seat belt with a mini latch and buckle which allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded The mini buckle and shoulder belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel for added convenience 1 Remove the mini latch and regular latch from its stowed position in the right rear side trim panel Mini Latch Stowage 2 Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the seat 48 TH
185. econds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnan
186. ed Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 gt 1L of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Also be sure the oil fill cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil Change Engine Oil The oil c
187. ed to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire NS TA TING AND OPERATING 343 pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire CAUTION Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately e The TPMS has been optimized for the original 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure warnings have been established for the tire size Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold operation or sensor damage may result when us placard pressure value ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the v
188. ed up vehicle is dangerous The Jack Location vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor could be crushed Never put any part of your body in the cargo area under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Continued WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379 Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 6 Spare Tire and Jack Stowage 3 Set the parking brake Spare Tire Stowage The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor 4 Place the shift lever in PARK automatic transmission in the cargo area or REVERSE manual transmission Spare Tire Removal 5 Turn OFF the ignition Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down 380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN id 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For exampl
189. eering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M example you can use the compound form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help
190. ehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 458 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e f for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 877 426 5337 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center PO Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 459 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its cust
191. eigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are younger than one year old NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small Rearward facing child seats must never be used in to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe while the child s back is against the seatback they injury or death to infants in this position should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap Older Children
192. el to access the switches 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays
193. eleased the BAS is deactivated WARNINCG e The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions e The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplan ing e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 313 NOTE Anytime the ESC system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for
194. elerations fifth gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop NOTE During cold weather until the transmission lubricant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transmission STARTING AND OPERATING 295 Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in the following table Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds Units in mph km h Engine Size Accel eration Rate All En gines Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life 296 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION If you skip more than one gear while downshifting CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the or downshift at too high a vehicle speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch down to second or first gear when descending a steep vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine grade is at idle speed Wh
195. els on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 Odometer Trip Odometer Display Area This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven NOTE U S Federal regulations require that upon trans fer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero
196. em yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system modify the airbag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated Continued e t 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME with airbag system electrical components While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer ser vice the airbag system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an ED
197. emental Seat Mounted Side Airbag SAB Inflator Units If Equipped The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MEM Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 millisec
198. en turning a corner or driving up a steep grade Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL downshift early so that the engine will not be into any forward gear when the engine is above overburdened idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED is firmly on the brake pedal NOTE The Continuously Variable Automatic Transmis sion CVT changes ratios in a continuous manner This may sometimes feel as if it is slipping but this is normal and does not harm anything NOTE You MUSI press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ON or START position and the brake pedal is pressed Brake Transmission Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the P
199. ener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to thi
200. ept full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Pe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 e Air Conditioner Control NOTE Press this button to turn on the air e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK conditioning during manual operation position the recirculation feature will be cancelled only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will T flow through the outlets selected with 045638696 the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive w
201. er Control knob on the left to AUTO UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dialin the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the sys tem will maintain that level automati 045638695 cally using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person is 72 F 22 C however this may vary 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary e f your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiat
202. er s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 460 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
203. ers and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 Maintenance Free Battery WARNING Continued Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep tenance required flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with WARNING an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can clamps to touch each other burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling e The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented
204. essing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The mi
205. etooth Communication Link Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the the system from announcing the new incoming mes Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection sages can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in e Press the Ne button Bluetooth ON mode e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Voice Tree Main Menu Recent Towing gency English p Uconnect Francais Last See Enter Enter Number See Setup Read Send Phonebook Name Number on Phone Flowchart Messages Messages j Flowchart is redialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607515 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Entries Listed one Enter Name Enter Name PA Enter Name 1st Confirmation Enter Location Ente
206. f Equipped 208 D Control Buttons EE ES ES SS Se 208 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC IP EQUIPPeG 210 3 Engine Oil Change Indicator System If Ediiped P ss SA ER SERE 213 O EVIC Functions sekere ED 6 ee Has 215 D Compass Temperature Audio O Average Fuel Economy o Distance To Empty DTE 5 2 dare ms 214 D Tire Pressure Monitor IPM 215 O Elapsed TMe esse e auct BERE SAO AARDE 215 O Personal Settings Customer Programmable DOGS soel ERA RA EE Eae 215 ll Media Center 230 REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUXJack lesen 220 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 229 H Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 291 O List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WEL DIE oes ese oe debere d ardt DK Bere E hdd 233 O Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA l2 P 299 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Iz eiiis oro D 239 lll Media Center 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV If EUIPO e 122 29 VERRE S cored HER 445 Me 239 O Operating Instructions Voice Command System It Egquipped issie ea ien 240 D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped ll Media Center 130 Sales Code RES H Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Opera
207. f of your vehicle DO e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the crossbars installed The load should be secured roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the This E especially true on large flat loads and Hey roof place a blanket or other protective layer result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle between the load and the roof surface To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ibs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropri ately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Continued WARNING Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS la Instrument Panel Features 192 Mi Instrument Cluster 0 08 193 H Instrument Cluster Descriptions 194 ll Mini Trip Computer I
208. f your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 045607535 The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 Temperature Control Blower Control 045607539 Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O OFF position There are seven blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position 045607540 NOTE Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insect
209. fect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pnr per hues Gas ERROR ETTET 457 O Prepare For The Appointment 457 df te dies PESE 44444 d eed apne ade rr d 457 o Be Reasonable With Requests 457 N If You Need Assistance 457 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 458 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 458 Hn Medico Contactes ss x Ee AD RAS VR 458 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 459 A eve CONTACT avo messie we se se ee SR 459 Mi Warranty Information 460 E MOPAR Parts ose xd ee ERR 460 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 460 O In The 50 United States And Washington BENE OM oer ee eee ee ee ee O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 456 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN id lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Tra lion Grades 4i bs ce DER dos ru RAE 463 Quality Gades P 463 oO Treadwear 4 met SE aem SES SE Re 463 Temperate Grades c ocior thew ee ea S 464 NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 457 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you r
210. file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Fre i gem lin B Rate Gems 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 125 48 44 1 32 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 Layer 3 MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 24 22 05 16 56 48 40 3
211. first condition that it detects a ER In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE text au a MN at ut message and a graphic of the pressure value s with the al AL low tire s flashing i nm mim n sm 81826bed Low Tire Pressure Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the LOW TIRE text message will no longer be displayed NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 349 the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received 81826bd7 Check TPM System Display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing t
212. for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 021410235 Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal 1 Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Accessory position 3 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 4 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tem porarily in the ignition switch cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi
213. gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
214. ges will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing The Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped wit
215. gine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 446 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 64 000 miles 104 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air condition
216. go should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of 328 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs NOTE 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs e The following table shows examples on how to calcu 295 kg late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capac
217. h a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages more easily The tether strap should be routed over the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seatback Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat f N ETA N Rear Seat Tether Anchors Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts EN
218. hange indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine o
219. hat of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed STARTING AND OPERATING 341 E C E ce 055707139 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that 342 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id when the outside temperature decreases the ti
220. hat the and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest lean forward and release the lever In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat To fold the front passenger seat lift the recliner handle to the full upward position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the seat cushion mm p sii Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Lever i 030940025 Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNINCG The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings only through visu
221. he CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu displays in the EVIC 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly Compass Variance Map set the compass will automatically compensate for the 1 Turn the ignition switch ON S and provide the most accurate compass head 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi 5 mately two seconds NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the right rear quarter window This is where the compass sensor is located 040506040 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 Press the DOWN button until Compass Varian
222. he engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it can
223. he main menu Disc Menu Radio t itch to the radi j ERA leke to en e To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Memo Previous to play the previous memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In l l Delete to delete a memo this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the Ee olie al memos recording you may press the Voice Command vR Setup button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup you may say on of the the following commands following Save to save the memo e Change to setup Continue to continue recording e Switch to system setup Delete to delete the recording e Change to setup e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos Main menu setup or During the playback
224. he minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL contro
225. he parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application towing up long grades on hot days the auto turns on you will experience reduced vehicle perfor turns off you may continue to drive normally If the high 15 Transmission Temperature Warning Light During sustained high speed driving or trailer B matic transmission oil may become too hot When the transmission overheat warning light mance until the automatic transmission cools down Once the transmission has cooled down and the light speed is maintained the overheating will continue to occur UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 If the overheating continues it may become necessary to stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light turns off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN 16 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped CAUTION This light will flash at a fast rate for a
226. he system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value 350 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM Sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the UHECK TPM SYSTEM mes sage is then followed with a graphic display with pres sure values still shown This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message is displayed NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spa
227. he vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly installed a gASCAP message will be displayed in the Odometer Trip Odom eter in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Description in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer trip odometer RESET button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to the driver s door B Pillar The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 359 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
228. headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 20 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Instrument Panel Dimming Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rear view mirror Each light is turned on by pressing the button Press the button a second time to turn the 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id light off The lights also come on when a door is opened NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the pressed a second tim
229. hicle registration I nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently For states that require an Inspection and Mainte serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ig
230. hile it lists options press the Voice Command EVR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command GEVR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Command vr button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command SVR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com
231. ic Brake Control System 310 Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assist System Electronic Roll Mitigation 470 INDEX M Tract on Control Siel OAR eiue X EE ES 311 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 158 Electtonic Stability Control ESC resserrer asss 316 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 210 Emergency In Case of dei PT IE EE EE EET EER 378 ed DEE as osse ARE AA DAAL IS e eene 385 TOWING T 272 Emission Control System Maintenance 400 POMC soes hee Ru d B Rue gonad amp eae RR S 997 399 block HOE M T Tp 295 Break In Recommendations 82 Checkmg Oi evel suisses Bet RR de aon 403 Sun Ac CTTDCTT 413 Exhaust Gas Caution 84 355 Fuel Requietments ss vu 55 84 HE Bk 392 JOM DEEG gis os dan es hEr ar 385 a eee a 403 436 437 OIL Change Inlerval is se ER Ed RR rhet 404 Oil Puller Cap ist Ee AA PRESE ERE 397 398 405 BIN IG AAR N OE ees 437 Oil Selection eux wars 2 oo Sa Gee VUE das id 404 CLP DELG seia tee ee aso ose be ees 405 Gverheali jacinta ks Ghana pua xq d tats 376 Temperatite Gauge ia 47h aneneene ands 200 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 69 Ethanol 2 4 6226204 burden ESSO ERSABrA3 5A xe 353 Event Data Recorder ss 72 Exhaust Gas Caution 36 84 355 lbjici e cid rm 84 411 EXtelor Lights sieners irre eR A SUR RAAT HO 87 Filters Air Cleaner SS 406 DAC OUE ONINE 444 ens diii OA KOR BE
232. ically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 348 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi Ju Or 3 gu nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will AE EE E 3 be activated when one or more of the four active road tire murus ogg Porro P argum pressures are low The audible chime will sound once T ELLA every ignition cycle for the
233. ically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tem peratures 045607557 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger 045640031 Automatic Temperature Control Automatic Operation Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blow
234. icle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure NS TA TING AND OPERATING 345 The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish and the LOW TIRE message will turn off once the updated tire pres sures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of
235. il ON or OFF appears to make your selection Sound Horn with Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Lock feature Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone power sunroof and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until OFF 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears to make your selection Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is sele
236. ill be illumi nated All other stability features of ESC function nor mally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction 318 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE e To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momen tarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion e When in Partial Off mode the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced Full Off Four Wheel Drive Models Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by pressing and holding the ESC Off switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESC OFF message will appear in the odometer Press and release the Trip Odometer button located on the instrument clu
237. ils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filtersfrom your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filt
238. ime and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or Adult Hits Adlt Hit N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 16 Digit Character Display Countr Countr News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM oe If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program T
239. ime press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id DOOR LOCKS WARNINCG Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock knob to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries or death CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Power Door L
240. indow fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows e Recirculation Control to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog The system will automatically control recircu press the Recirculation button to return to outside air lation However pressing the Recirculation Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured Control button will put the system in recircu interior air to condense on windows and hamper lation mode This can be used when outside visibility For this reason the system will not allow conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recircula the control button to illuminate tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed
241. ing filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Replace rear drive assembly RDA fluid Replace power transfer unit PTU fluid Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km O C O C L L L L L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 447 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 72 000 miles 117 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engin
242. ing in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats If Equipped Some models may be equipped with a power driver s seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard ER eee Ca side of the seat near the floor Use the switch to move the Power Seat Switch seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the seat NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING ADE The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of move in the direction of the switch Release the switch control which could cause a collision and serious when you have reached the desired position injury or death l Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down 3 Seats should be adjusted before fastening the The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked Serious upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat injury or death could result from a poo
243. ing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h To Accelerate For
244. install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary e n the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out e f the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME e Buckle th
245. intermittent settings for low speed wiper opera tion Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper opera tion 031507503 Wiper Control Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever Rotate the end of the lever upward clockwise to decrease the delay time and N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 downward counterclockwise to increase the delay time The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approxi mately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the control lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed while the lever is pulled and for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent inter val previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid su
246. inutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the air intake duct If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer 390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE Ist gear and REVERSE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure
247. ional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 11 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 12 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 13 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi see tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and
248. ions or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in Tire Safety Information for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle 366 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION e Do nottow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload
249. is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 363 Trailer Hitch Classificatio
250. is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning light is on Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system The
251. isc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e RES isasingle CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD
252. ity of your vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Occupant 1 200 ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 ibs Occupant 2 180 tos Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 ibs Occupant 2 200 ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 lbs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 330 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affe
253. key is in the ACC automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain position will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all drive wheels are off the ground Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 373 CAUTION Continued e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flashers 376 B If Your Engine Overheats 376 M Automatic Transmission Overheating Ad Bl Jacking And Tire Changing 378 O Jack Location sesso eh IR RE NE HE 378 appare Tre DIONdPE 2 ea oe oe HEURE A 379 O Preparations For Jacking 379 O Jacking Instructions 0 380 ll Jump Starting Procedures O Preparations For Jump Start D Jump Starting Procedure Bl Freeing A Stuck Vehicle W Shift Lever Override Mi Towing A Disabled Vehicle O With Ignition Key o Without The Ignition Key 376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time
254. key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 4 Oil Pressure Warning Light qum This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 5 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 8 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 6 Speedometer The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and or kilometers per hour mph kph
255. l MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 3 Twist and remove socket from lamp 4 Remove bulb from socket and replace License Lamps 1 Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise 3 Pull bulb from socket Center High Mounted Stoplamp This light is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel Approximate 13 6 Gallons 51 5 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 0L and 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 26 Liters Cooling System Se 2 0L and 2 4L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 7 2 Quarts 6 8 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs ZFR5F 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 87 Octane 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part
256. l knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to D
257. l Care lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e f you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR a month Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint t is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing open Hu el ME EES GEE OUE OE DOR If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint l touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is CAUTION considered the responsibility of the owner e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads co
258. l DUTLET CONTROL DNE RAME t gp qw v AK e wae ut fi HAUL ra vnitot BATTERY HEATED anto anode SEAT BELT aun DOO lr M us a Vi Eme p TEE i HALL CAU Ni ROET TERIER AHCHOS S7 E u 9 00 Cu uu LOW abah PLIG POWER SLiDIAG DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTEN AND TETHER FOR ECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL ATEUENO FLUID OMAN RELEASE HAMME CIL OREN RATE purTONM DirvE tO C B E SRS x A um m k r AIC AIRBAG rvs i N 2 PUSH TE BALAN TRANS EINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PABLERGER DOC ALIAS DOGNVERTISILE CDHVERTIELE SEE OVERS AR ELECTI Bo ATOR LHGHT BL TEME TEMPESATUSS RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIAG OFF TOF DCRWH TOP UF MA MAR CCF CUOMWIHTIONER STABILITY 010533317 cuowrmoL OFF INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS a This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through N the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION NN Id VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthines
259. l Information If a ratio other than first is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transmission control logic will automatically select the first gear ratio If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit the transmission will automatically select the next higher ratio e If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine However the CVT will stay in the manually selected ratio If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off If the system detects a problem it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected 302 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED This feature provides full time on demand four wheel drive 4WD Four Wheel Drive Switch Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if addi tional traction is needed in sand deep snow or loose INA 051906185 traction surfaces activate the 4WD LOCK switch by pulling up once and releasing This locks the center coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear wheels The 4WD Indicator Light will come on in the cluster This can be done on the fly at any vehicle speed To deactivate simply pull on the switch one more time The 4WD
260. lant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If the instrument cluster will sound a chime When safe pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot idle Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off immediately and call for AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING service During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days the automatic transmission oil may become too hot If this happens the transmission overheat in dicator light will come on and the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transmission cools down enough to allow a return to the requested speed If the high speed is maintained the overheating may reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion 378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Continued e The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jack
261. late down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully Insert the mini latch plate into the slot provided in the trim panel Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger ALR ALR ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so a
262. ld stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 tires or whe
263. lectronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
264. lied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel NS TA TING AND OPERATING 315 HSA Activation Criteria Disabling Enabling HSA The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system it can be activate done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un e Vehicle must be on a 7 grade or greater hill derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion e Vehicle must be stopped e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the ing uphill is in REVERSE gear following steps WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle 3 Apply the parking brake 4 Start the engine 316 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id 5 Release the clutch pedal 6 Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left
265. like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VR button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number usi
266. ll the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrup
267. llows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow
268. loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem po
269. lt Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observ
270. lways be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 normal conditions However in an accident the belt will WARNING Continued lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat vehicle or being thrown out belts are designed to go around the large bones of WARNING your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident the e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or best outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in the
271. mand system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Radio FM e Previous Channel to select the previous channel T itch to the F FM or Radio FM I dde eae ee dy ordinum _ List Channel to hear a list of available channels e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel l M Radio t itch to th di e Next Station to select the next station enu Radio to switch to the radio menu BT s 44 p h h 3 e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to t
272. med from your cellular phone to the Uconnect phone system Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To get into the BISA mode press either AUX button on the radio or press the VR button and say Bluetooth Streaming Audio Play Mode When switched to BTSA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected and played Selecting Different Audio Device 1 Press PHONE button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a BISA device Only the current song that is playing will display info 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the whe
273. ming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light 030407085 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when CAUTION the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirror Driver Side Adjust the flat outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the door glass Outside Mirror Passenger Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the 030406002 Side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle Automatic Dimming Mirror NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 WARNING Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side door trim panel convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside
274. mple T145 80D18 103M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 335 Since this tire has limited tread life the original eguip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If E
275. n Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 lbs 4 540 Kg Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 364 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note 2 0L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 50 kg 2 4L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150
276. n variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre i gem lun P Rote Gems 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency KHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to
277. n Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 353 o MMT In Gasoline 290 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id O Materials Added To Fuel i434 224a 354 DB Common Towing Definitions 360 Hi Fiiel System C aullOBS au icum s eth pereigi 354 D Trailer Hitch Classification ss suom mi 363 oO Carbon Monoxide Warnings 355 H Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer B Adding Fuel se ee aa o LEE ids 5 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap o a eed 356 H Trailer And Tongue Weight 364 H Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 358 de Me EE dd W Vehicle Loading 358 COMING C M E n O Vehicle Certification Label 2 9 x 358 M ME Behind Motorhome Etc 0 2 NM ailer TOWING ue us uu Cis arr s sou ss ec ao ied 360 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift lever in NEUTRAL NOTE e The engine will not start unless the clutch
278. n band radios etc j A 022610242 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label If Equipped When the airbag deploys it opens the seam between the Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags may provide front and side of the seat s trim cover Each airbag enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left airbag only and a right side impact deploys the right airbag only Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC airbags may offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC airbags deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side Side Curtain Airbag Label Location NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC curtains on both sides of the vehicle may deploy e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e Being too close to the Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain and or Seat Mounted Side Airbag during deployment could cause you to be severel
279. named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 Layer 3 Sampling Fre gen lun P Rate Gems 48 64 96 128 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load th
280. ne call can be placed on hold at a time NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VR button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the amp button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Call Con
281. nect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect M customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle
282. ng Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and
283. ng Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vn button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vm button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Svea button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or
284. ng process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial By Saying A Number Press the Se button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EINEN Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook Call By Saying A Name Press th
285. ng the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 322 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 323 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load S
286. ngine oil filter J 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 32 000 miles 52 000 km Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the engine air cleaner filter irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the spark plugs 24 000 miles 39 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect exhaust system Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 445 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule m m Change the engine oil and en
287. nition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE Inte
288. not be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will
289. nsider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPARS cleaners or equivalent are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
290. nspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 453 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer 114 Months Maintenance Service to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions Schedule warranty L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter WARNING _I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 152 000 miles 247 000 km e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and ef
291. ntional tampering with emissions control Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed systems may void your warranty and could result in civil maintenance schedule there are other components which penalties being assessed against you may require servicing or replacement in the future WARNING CAUTION You can be badly injured working on or around a e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per motor vehicle Only do service work for which you form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Continued The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limit
292. nutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to
293. nutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses KR5518002015B 2671 5180015B United States 0 0 Canada s us nu mue ACE SOR RUE x 352 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE id FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 0L And 2 4L Engine This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800dfabe line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have i
294. o provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in
295. ocks A power door lock switch is located on the driver s and front passenger s door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate NOTE To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle the power door lock switch will not operate when the key is in the ignition and either front door is open A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key 021806187 Driver Power Door Lock Switch 1 Unlock 2 Lock Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Auto Lock feature is enabled 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Eguipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2
296. odels equipped with manual seats the adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats near the floor While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have Front Seat Adjustment Bar 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever located on the outboard side of the seat Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat height 030907660 Seat Height Adjustment Lever Manual Lumbar If Equipped The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard side of the driver s seatback Rotate the lever downward to increase the lumbar support or rotate the lever upward to decrease the lumbar support UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Lumbar Adjustment Lever Reclining Seat Lever WARNING To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired angle Do not ride with the seatback reclined so t
297. of corrosion protection in the ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance engine cooling system period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warming words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may resu
298. of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro tection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emer gency it should be replaced with the
299. oft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the cover Refer to Engine Compartment in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 072739988 Integrated Power Module Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Empty Empty o 15 Amp AWD AWD Control Lt Blue Module 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse 10 Amp Rear Center Brake 20 Amp Power Locks Interior Red Light Switch Yellow Lighting 10 Amp Ignition Switch 15 Amp Power Outlet Red Occupant Classifica Lt Blue
300. omatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Sef mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Aulo Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Aulo Set temperature knobs for comfort User selectable to any speed Automatic User selectable to any speed Aulomalic User selectable to any air delivery point User selectable io any air delivery point Automatic Automatic Automatic Auiomatic bur can be overridden User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable outside or recirculated Automatic User selectable ASC on or off User selectahle AIC on or off 045609172 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings exc
301. omatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result Manual Transmission e Front Wheel Drive FWD or All Wheel Drive AWD CAUTION vehicles can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL e If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC e FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels position not in the LOCK position elevated Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when e FWD or AWD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck towing When securing the vehicle to a flatbed all wheels OFF the ground truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result All Transmissions from improper towing If you must use the accessories wipers defroster etc while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must 394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 2 0L 397 N Engine Compartment 2 4L 398 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 399 H Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 399 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
302. omer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufactur
303. on is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation condition the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change and even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441 scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to th
304. on to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A gASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer RESET button to turn off the message If the problem 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent ve
305. on to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the vn button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VR button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset
306. onds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to defl
307. or Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation 320 STARTING AND OPERATING Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Tire Markings e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off
308. or and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to the AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off 045607536 position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details Automatic Temperature Control Operation Operation How NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 Blower Control Mode Control The system will Air Temperature Contrel Air Recirculation Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can be overridden Automatic Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic Blower and Mode Preferred Aut
309. ormulated Gasoline liess 352 Reise t aheepe teens qa Gare daba ed ws 409 Reminder Seat Belt llle 57 Remote Control Door LOCKS 223 i utd some bis ORE raris 18 eetk Agi ses d RAS Barat P E wd ERR eS 17 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 18 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 272 Remote Starting Systemi ssa oea He Bora doa egi 25 Replacement DUDS isi s 4a 6 EER aer DEE 433 Replacement Keys os sacra e ECXCRORURRRCS HO nis 15 Replacement ats es aema a a aaa E ee s 401 Replacemeni Hie 2s ccc a ded ya tesari 133 deba 338 Reporting Safety Defects isi dea axes RD xe 460 Restraint Head 212 244 24 vices EER RES GER EE Restraints Child cess Restraints Infant 2 529202 4 m o eR HAS eR Restraints Occupant 478 INDEX M Retractable Cargo Area Cover 181 Kol Over Wane 206466 iN BEER DE eee eee et 4 Rotati n reS ios 5e 8 06 Rey PER EE RAL SEE 340 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 85 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 87 Safety Defects Reporting xa vx Ese RARR ER Ew 460 Safety Information Tire ie koekie tiem ces 320 Dalcty SIDS I 83 Safety di d sa sore qoe aod AE OR elei ES a 84 Satellite Radio Antenna 237 262 Schedule Maintenance leen 440 Seat Belt Maintenance uua cheer viowS teas 429 Seat Belt Reminder 2 245454545040 Eee SO S E d o Seat Belts lle 37 85 Adjustable Shoulder
310. ose control and have ings a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom capacity other than what was originally equipped mended on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued 340 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires can be identified by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than t
311. osition It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 28 AWD Warning Light If Equipped This light monitors the 4 Wheel Drive 4WD system The light will come on for a bulb check when the ignition key is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as three seconds When lit solid There is a 4WD system fault 4WD performance will be at a reduced level Service the AWD system soon 4WD When blinking The 4WD system is temporarily dis abled due to overload condition 29 Electronic Vehicle Information Center E
312. our gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued NS TA TING AND OPERATING 355 CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition WARNING malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly some light smoke your engine may be out of tune Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon or malfunctioning and may require immediate monoxide poisoning service Contact your authorized dealer for service e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon assistance monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which
313. over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance CAUTION ed test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this e t is essential when replacing the cables on the time battery that the positive cable is attached to the CAUTION positive post and the negative cable is attached to EE PORIS AO posi Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning tive and negative and are identified on the system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for
314. over materials that can burn Such materials might have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex be grass or leaves coming into contact with your haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams hicle in areas where your exhaust system can or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep contact anything that can burn 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil
315. pect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter 1 Flush and replace engine coolant at Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 00 km or 60 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for whichever occurs first damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 451 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Replace the accessory drive belt s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule m d O C O C C L L L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear
316. peed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 333 loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision AI ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and Wheel If Equipped The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of
317. pes of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
318. phone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped For the radio Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES TM If Equipped Refer to Video Entertainment System VES TM in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories
319. ping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Mainte nance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce the potential for engine and transmission overheating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily 372 STARTING AND OPERATING M RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission Flat Tow None e Transmission in NEUTRAL e Key in ACC OK FWD Only c NOTE Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be recreationally towed flat towed at any legal CAUTION highway speed for any distance if the manual transmis e Do not flat tow any vehicle equipped with a sion is in NEUTRAL and the ignition
320. plete transmission failure Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Special Additives Do not add any materials other than leak detection dyes to Continuously Variable Transmission CVT Fluid CVTF 4 CVTF 4 is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked only by a trained technician Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Manual Transmission If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of N M
321. posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS idle PEE DE 93 WMiUconnect Phone If Equipped 97 O Inside Day Night Mirror see ses 93 sieut PP 99 o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 93 H Phone C
322. pproxi eo mately 16 seconds when the vehicle security Driving with a hot engine cooling system could alarm is arming and then will flash slowly damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads until the vehicle is disarmed H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealership for service 17 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range NE o UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 18 Cruise Indicator If Equipped CRUISE Tris indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Control System is ON 19
323. q pubs 972 4 v 364 TOWING ASSISTING cue SEL dS ye cae EL was A 112 trailer TOWNS ases 14 4 0254 4 PRE RE 360 Cooling Systemi IPS oos vas 44 aad e 371 FINCHES PC 363 Minimum Requirements oce ecce 294 aes 366 Trailer and Tongue Weight 364 VIG Ge ote Ge eon s 09 ER URGE Foe naa ER 369 Trailer Towing Guide lt i 4 45 lt s8e4esna E dedo 364 Ter Weg ia ane ob Rem EER we DiE po es 364 onto mn 296 Automatic sess 12 291 296 421 AUDE sep yee y qs SA DRS RE EN 300 Manual one Bee amp ace eee GR Ge ee 291 294 Penn s cups dao CR ban UR PERS hoes 296 Overdrive sa ao RE EER EER ERA DAG 300 Selection of Lubricant ESE Se 421 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry amp iex 49 45 dete rA 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 161 Transportne d CIS dia oad SODA riit Ereni 82 Tread Wear Indicators ills 2007 MPC OMIT veu wea Re pd were RE PES 208 Hi Odometer a suce EE rera HAAR AA OR ee 203 Trip Odometer Reset Button 2 529299 VR ed 201 Turn OUES es aoa se x Bat DER Ai AR AE 150 195 435 UCI Connector ax 2922 629 Wii v EE ne S4 i hs 265 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 97 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 192 Uniform Tire Quality Grades s uos oe REG 463 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 265 Universal Transmitter 482 INDEX M Unleaded Gasoline EE EE EE Ee 352 Y A POTE 97 Variance COMPASS uu accede on terdi
324. quipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as 336 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id your original equipment tire replace or repair the Tire Spinning original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not first opportunity spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without WARNING stopping when you are stuck Limited use spares are for emergency use only In Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle Emergencies for further information handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire
325. r Location Current Number Enter Number is played Enter New Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6b 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Voice Tree Setup Setup Device Towing Confirmation Select Audio SMS Incoming Announcement WI English Espanol temporarily or Francais Confirmation Prompts pin code overdo pin code Phones plioim HA EE List Phones priorities Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Primar e O C G Voice Commands Primar call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergenc English erase all Espanol Francais help home NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Voice Commands Primar language send 0 o 000000 0 0 list names list phones towing assistance a mute off new entr transfer call n Uconnect Tutorial try again aaa veo nt ee pager mobile N set up phone settings or phone phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again o redial 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
326. r Por tis 219 Vehicle Certification Label 22s 358 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Welicle Loading esencia EL ARE dd 327 358 360 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 beso Den 284 433 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Voice Recognition System VR 128 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster IJOSCHPUD x 13 t2 3 chaos XT CREER RE RES 194 Marne Boll VP 2s aes apaa o9 R09 HER RD DE 4 Warnings and Cautions 354546445 496 0ue 4 64 7 Warranty Information ses ws HER RUS BR RR ER 460 Josep Adding Fd s2 cursos d dodo us dope bos 410 Washers Windshield less 155 Washing Velle s nr see dA Pop eoa Ee A ERA 424 Wheel and Wheel Trim 3 2 95 duo RE EER uk hs 426 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care Ls 426 Wand DUMCUNS 56 4 Ge ob oe oA OAR Ret EDE 170 Window POSSE os sees reri rrp yur DORS 285 luum 22402424406 EE ET EE VEELS 33 l7 P TM 33 Windshield Defroster 85 276 277 282 Windshield Washers 152 155 Windshield Wipers sae a a9 ex es 152 410 Wipers EROTIHELODIE lt eeri seen d R04 ond aware d 154 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive powe
327. r connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 11MK49 126 AD Fourth Edition Printed in U S A
328. r to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of the manual HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like normal When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi nal set speed HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving At vehicle speeds above 31 mph 50 km h HDC will no longer function If the HDC Indicator Light begins to flash this indicates that the brakes are getting too hot and the vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed Hill Start Assist HSA Manual Transmission Only The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle app
329. rary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle 362 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control
330. re Pressure Monitoring TPMS 201 TACHOR CONHO tees oe y docu Reus S e 319 TUS oignal x sida WESE E Y 4 87 148 150 435 o 194 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 194 Loading WEIMCle nz can are Bean BED d 358 360 Scholl P 360 TES RESO ESE IR DRR eee a PS 326 Locks Child Protection 42a KEPER REE ESS 32 a EEEEEELILIILLGLIIIIUIIIIIIIIUIIILUUII LI LLLHLCEELE LALPOILLLLILocIIAUIBPCCR OSSBUdQ di INDEX 475 DOOR AE EO SO IE KERE EE DOGS 28 Power Door 24 54 bo 4 6 oo RE MERE E Ege 29 IESDECOHOIb DOO ses Ae RARR eens oes 409 L mbDar SUpport as oou gx Kr DEERE e a aes 138 Maintenance Free Battery as sees gore des 407 Maintenance Procedures 0 0004 402 Maintenance Schedule 440 Maintenance General seen 402 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 205 400 Manual Transaxle 291 294 422 Downshiting acaso nna nees AREA dI Sed 295 Fluid Level Check sss 422 423 Frequency of Fluid Change 422 423 424 Lubricant Selection ES 422 423 Manual Service steke ss Bg 5 PER ES Res 461 Map Reading LEnS s oues ph UE ates 151 Master Cylinder Brakes ik er i EY RR RR 419 Me thanol sie EER RIA SEA EN 353 Mini Inip Computer 2225255 253900 9T IE TS 208 NBPCOLS 22 neci 09 e ee eee as E EPA PORE ES 93 tor ALG UIE gate sende ed KERR 4 Ks 93 Electric Powered ss 95 Imt I o AE ee KOLE TER TIT 96
331. re pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may ne
332. re tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire The LOW TIRE text message and the graphic with the low tire pressure flashing will be displayed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a mini mum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 mi
333. res may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 332 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High S
334. ress firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immedi ately ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af Anti Lock Brake System ABS forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake tires or the traction afforded performance under most braking conditions The system The ABS cannot prevent collisions including automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking those resulting from excessive speed in turns conditions to prevent wheel lock up following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Continued WARNING Continued e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others fes The ABS Warning Light monitors the ABS System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake
335. ring a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION e te JF n X gt SL WATER iM FUEL EUN M exon wun HIGH BEAM FT i UV 2D I t MASTER LzHTIM SWITCH WX AE AR WERD WTERMITTENT WER ER p M pm FUEL PILL SIDE M DOME LHAT 0 FRONT FOG LIGHT ESP BAS ELECT MM ry e 0 d a c TURM SIGNALS TED SEAT A MM u DEAT a HEATED DOOR LOOF Es E 3 a a OD ES REY ACTOATE LPPET AND LOWER ms Roa Wende LIFT imr oc ya HILL DESSERT POWER OUTLET MR OUTLET CONTHOL BRAKE L PE a rd aa M o A RECINCULATIC ELECTHONIC HOOD RELEANE LEBER AIH ALL YIHERL PLUME DE ANTHLOER IMITLET DRIVE AO BTrhUmIrY CONTROL Mar ETSIEM v dE c a VI we yl De mon Wa Baie LD ELE GT INGANG ERANE SYSTEM ENGINE DEL RE AN WIE p 0x4 PARE LEHTA BEAR ETI LAMP EG EE GAT AND VEHTILATMO FAN WIHOUW LUCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARRING DiTADOET DPEM LOWER hu
336. rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet s
337. ristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 339 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could l
338. rly adjusted Wil move in the direction of the switch Release the seatbelt switch when you have reached the desired position Tilting The Seat Up Or Down CAUTION The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four Do not place any article under a power seat or directions Pull upward or push downward on the front impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s the switch when you have reached the desired position path 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF If HIGH level heating is selected the system automati cally switches to LOW level heating and turns one indi
339. ropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability e Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB AUX connector port which is located in the center console or glove compart ment 044136844 USB AUX Connector Port Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod9 USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to USB port e The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 e The audio device
340. rs 199 2 High Low Beam Switch lisse 150 O Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 140 o Flash To Pass 0 LLL Lu 150 A Fedd Restraints 22 44 susct hosce ded bier 141 O Instrument Panel Dimming 151 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 ELMiap Reading Lights ee su EE RR Ea dol M Windshield Wipers And Washers 152 o Windshield Wiper Operation 154 O Intermittent Wiper Systemi ss sae aos sordes 154 o Windshield Washers 22226224 9244444 155 AMi Peat 2209999 SARA RE ES PERS 156 B Tilt Steering Column 156 ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 158 El AO ELISE s cea Poe es Oho ene aoa RE 159 H To bet A Desired Speed ise eso d 159 01o Deactivate ss ah as RR MR RR SER DE Re 159 H IG Beste Speed od wwe Eye v ode dp SR V 160 o To Vary The Speed Setting 160 o To Accelerate For Passing 160 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 161 O Programming HomeLink 162 H Gate Operator Canadian Programming H Using HomeLink O Reprogramming A Single HomeLink DUON are 254269454455 55559 nee oes 166 siu CP EE 166 o Troubleshooting Tips a s oe dime 166 O General Information 167 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 167 O Opening Sunroof Express 168 D Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 168 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
341. ry park CAUTION the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this NOTE Remove Air Intake before proceeding with this could establish a ground connection and personal Jump Starting procedure injury could result 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the Jump Starting Procedure positive post of the discharged vehicle WARNING 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 389 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few m
342. s Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes 045607544 The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level gt e Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets J NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor R Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Pe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require
343. s Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming Homel ink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indica tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release
344. s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if R equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone amp e button and Voice Command vr button that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra t VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the st
345. s all languages N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area e f supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer gency your mobile phone must be e turned on e paired to the Uconnect System e and have network coverage 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and
346. s and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 12 O Ignition Key Removal 12 B Locking Doors With A Key 14 H Key In Ignition Reminder 14 W Sentry GEE EE ET OR N 14 El Replacement Keys 2235 2c T Rex ds 15 O Customer Key Programming 16 O General Information su ss c9 bre meg e 17 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 17 o To Arm The System o To Disarm The System D Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override lll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped o To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate O Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Press D Illuminated Approach If Equipped o To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id O Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock 21 3 Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock 22 O Using Ihe Panic Alarm aces s Ren 22 O Programming Additional Transmitters 23 E General Information 29a sedes bee a Er 3 23 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 24 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 EL How do Use Remote Stari uus zar ent ea x 25 Mi look RED 28 o Manual Door Locks 2404 6669050 44840084 28 O Power Door Locks 425454844404 END EE 29 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Bi perser anaes ER eda rd d d 22 ll Power
347. s to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
348. se areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Continued Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Pulling Out The Latch Plate mr sg X w 1 N M Lr Me NY T l sek S 022607724 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
349. se call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the 462 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id vehicle system and or components is written in e Owner s Manuals straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve Call toll free at hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by ot eee en ee step troubleshooting and drivability procedures e 1 800 387 1143 Canada proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools Or and equipment Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com NN F
350. sed noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible 304 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to
351. specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 CAUTION Continued Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant e Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR may not be compatible with the radiator engine Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula coolant and may plug the radiator HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to coolant antifreeze is not recommended exceed 7096 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance ized water when mixing the water engine coolant intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replace will reduce the amount
352. ss e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s designed specifically for your vehicle hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for 2 motoring safety collision 5 y Towing any trailer will increase your stopping The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven distance When towing you should allow for addi pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle ness and connector ra in front of you Failure to do so could result in a ap NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles collision wiring harness 370 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations O Oo o O OTO Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn O 057003766 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 7 X O O CO O D Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stop
353. ssenger Advanced Front Airbag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB If Bauioped The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment This low output e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch WARNING d Seat Track Positi and Seat Track Position Sensors e No objects should be placed over or near the e Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and airbag on the instrument panel because any such Front Passenger objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate Continued 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air WARNING Continued bag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the out e Do not put anything on or around the airbag board side of the front seats covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citize
354. ssued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 353 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline con
355. stand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in th
356. stem has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m x2 NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE PANIC button not pressed e System not disabled from previous remote start event e Vehicle theft alarm not active WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Continued 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued To Enter Remote Start Press and release the REMOTE START button e Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or
357. ster to clear this message In this mode ESC and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph 56 km h At 35 mph 56 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode as described above TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph 48 km h the ESC system shuts off ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving however ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 35 mph 56 km h The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESC is off NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 319 To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the ESC On mode of operation NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and an audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESC in the Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneu ver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESC Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only ESC Activation Malfunction Indicat
358. system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the ABS Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the STARTING AND OPERATING 309 benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immedi ate repair to the ABS is required When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops 310 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id You may also experience the following when the brake WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS contains sophis ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or system goes into anti lock mode e the ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time
359. t and lift the lid open To open the upper storage compartment push inward on the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid open 035306220 035306219 z Upper Storage Compartment 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Flashlight The dual function light is mounted in the headliner above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area and part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for convenience Press in on the flashlight to release it Press And Release To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high twice for low and a third time to return to off 035410217 Three Press Switch Cargo Cover The cargo area trim panels include two notches for mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo dates the reclining rear seat UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 To install the Cargo Cover insert either end of th
360. t be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow the procedure carefully Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emer gencies for further information Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 293 If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting and Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key in the ON position release the accelerator pedal and repeat the Normal Starting procedure WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time
361. t loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at wwew sirius com or at WWW siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The E
362. t switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the shift lever is in any position except PARK Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever 149 031407550 Front Fog Lights Control NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the head lights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407551 Turn Signals NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your
363. t women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 022634273 Advanced Front Airbag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Ad 2 Knee Bolster vanced Front Airbags NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger se
364. taining more than 1076 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer 354 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask y
365. ted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the
366. tem monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of this manual Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not 312 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is r
367. termittent mode only Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent position for rear wiper operation Rotate the center portion of the lever past the first detent to activate the rear washer The washer pump and the wiper will continue to operate as long as the switch is held for a maximum of 10 seconds Upon release the wiper will continue to cycle two times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to park Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the bottom right side of the blower control knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indica tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an addi tional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e
368. the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio I
369. the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Towing Assistance references e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 When calling a num
370. the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 346 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automat
371. the ground NOTE Refer to Tires General Information in Starting And Operating for further information about the spare tire it s use and operation 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left 2 to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly Jack Warning Label 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts the rear locations by two rectan gular cutouts 060635515 Front Jacking Location 060635516 Rear Jacking Location For vehicles equipped with plastic trim the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 383 3 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the
372. the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped For additional comfort pull the strap forward just enough to release the seatback latch Then push the OO seatback to a reclined position approximately 35 degrees Rear Seats Folded Flat maximum and release the strap To raise the seatback pull the strap forward and lift the seatback into its upright position 030906211 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only with the vehicle is parked TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick EN OE 031308687 panel Hood Release Lever 2 Move the safety latch located outside the vehicle under the front edge of the hood toward the center and raise the hood 031340027 Safety latch Lift the hood prop rod clipped to the right side left side facing hood of the engine compartment to secure the hood in the open position Place the hood prop at the location stamped into the
373. tinuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable acros
374. tion Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play O Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio Sales Code RES RSC H Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play O Notes On Playing MP3 Files EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 259 G Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 260 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Iz o otio orc m 261 N iPod USB MP3 Control If Equipped 265 D Connecting The iPod Or External USB pog MR ER ELE ET FEESTE 266 AUSHE HUS PeaQe 222259 94 Fees se ERES 266 H Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons 267 APOY NOC as cues GP Sae eeg EG y a ee ER 267 O List Or Browse Mode O Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA li Steering Wheel Audio Controls o Radio Operation aA c A m B CD DVD Disc Maintenance ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones ll Climate Controls o Manual Heating And Air Conditioning O Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped D Operating Tips 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Air Outlet 2 Demisters 3 Instrument Cluster 4 Radio a2 109 5 2 0 5 5 Storage Bin 6 Glove Compartment 7 Climate Controls 8 Power Outlet 04010773
375. tion characteristics 464 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 466 INDEX NEE Id ABS Anti Lock Brake System 308 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 415 ele dii ER SEE EE geese aeons 306 Adding Washer Fluid ua oe ede eed een tee eo 410 Additives Fuel nuuc 3 od 5 3 sot Poet en oie AD 354 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 406 Air Conditioner Maintenance 408 AF CONCINOMING uaque ipee node OER 44454 274 Air Conditioning Controls vacet
376. tire 4 Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id CAUTION WARNING Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp spare tire is mounted incorrectly edges NOTE The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts When reinstalling the original wheel prop erly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the wheel cover onto the wheel then install the wheel nuts 6 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 7 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft lbs 1
377. to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e f your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 377 CAUTION WARNING Driving with a hot cooling system could damage You or others can be badly burned by hot engine your vehicle If the pointer rises to the H red mark coo
378. to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages e Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Press the Sw button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Messages e You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the vr button while the system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 List of Preset Messages 13 I ll be late 1 Yes 14 Are you there yet 2 No 15 Where are we meeting 3 Where are you 16 Can this wait 4 I need more direction 17 Bye for now D LOL 18 When can we meet 6 Why 19 Send number to call 7 I love you 20 Start without me 8 Call me 9 Call me later 10 Thanks 11 See You in 15 minutes 12 I am on my way 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Blu
379. ton If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RHR RER RBZ or RHB user s manual for detailed operating instructions 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operating Instructions Voice Command System f Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES NOTE The radio sales co
380. ton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it
381. ueeze the e In the event of a power malfunction or the RKE liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid transmitter is inoperative insert the key into the motion liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right manual lock models only Using the liftgate handle pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion e Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a snap in cap that provides access to release the latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your 022206146 passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep Liftgate Latch Location the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen
382. uired to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Tire Terminology And Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 326 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location EET NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed c 1 on the driver s side B Pillar KG OR es 2 FRONT j SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an
383. um number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In additio
384. unc RO RED Er EE 363 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 161 Hood Release eee 146 IGDIDORU daos 219299 02059 62092 hee see hare re S 12 N INDEX 473 ING ee ee ee ER ES 12 Ignition ey Removal ixeeuasad REEDE HE DE 12 Immobilizer eint Key s ode rx nb d xa 14 Infant Restraint oos ocu cee dr RR Son dou Rer P EN d 74 Information Center Vehicle Ln 210 Inside Rearview Mirror 04 93 instrument C IU IF sis swaan PEL eee 0 A Gare 194 Instrument Panel and Controls 192 strument Panel Over oue vus e vou IS ed wars 428 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 428 Integrated Power Module Fuses 429 Interior Appearance Care uoce nta RA Ee E oe 427 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 154 IVOCHCHON 4444454 KARRE EE DE ED BORS E Jack EG ene AR OR as ORR ER E ERE RS 378 Jack Operation 239 oss ape Ye o erede een 378 380 Jac kine Ius melos boat ae ka RS MERELEE YS 380 JUMP DEEG ee ein beeen ee eee E RS EED wes 385 Eerlike ide si BREER WEEG RO HERE ER 14 kes LTOPRQRIDUP soas RED ER Here ee RE dor g 16 Key Repa MEIE seasaidh SEER e eases ae 15 Key Sentry Immobilizer ss eo aco 9 bo ER SR os 14 Keyless Entry System Sedan 18 GER ET EE EE EES 12 Knee Doler ere 6054445 kIGMRSGG E EL BED HEG 59 Lane Change and Turn Signals sues rue RRS 435 Is oot dor BONS ceea caso OES 24a eon A 40 La DOS 2 sx 2S Se ye Sa oa EERS DE RD DI 87 LIGOU 22x 249
385. unction N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Infla tor Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Suppl
386. ur defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Continued 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Always make sure that floor mats are properly e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the attached to the floor mat fasteners Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Continued driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting
387. user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the langu
388. vehicle s battery even when not in generator to recharge the vehicle s battery use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Continued 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders located in the back for the rear Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders There are passengers two illuminated cupholders located in the front 0351 0621 5 0351 t di Rear Cupholders Illuminated Front CuuBdidem UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 STORAGE To open the lower glove compartment pull outward on the release handle Glove Compartment And Storage Bin Located on the passenger side of the instrument panel are an upper storage bin and a lower glove compartment 035206143 Glove Compartment 035209107 1 Upper Storage Bin 2 Lower Glove Compartment 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Door Storage The interior door panels are equipped with lower storage areas 035206216 Rear Door Storage 035206217 Front Door Storage NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 CONSOLE FEATURES To open the lower storage compartment lift upward on The floor console contains both an upper and lower the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compart storage compartment men
389. vent of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when t
390. will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with
391. will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT
392. with seat belts to improve occupant protection Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags if equipped Active Head Restraints and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision 66 THINGS TO KN
393. y RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maxim
394. y injured or killed The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the side airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re main free from any obstructions Continued WARNING Continued e Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work
395. you may press the Voice Command vr button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands In this mode you may say the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo e Language English Next to play the next memo e Language French e Switch to setup N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command vr button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used Press the Voice Command SVR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people rid
396. your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your 334 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original equipment tire and wheel refer to the recommended tire rotation pattern in Tire Rotation Recommendations in Starting and Operating for further information If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Exa
397. your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your 3 GAWR vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact 5 This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock spare tire the trailer wheels P GCWR must not be exceeded Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Total weight must be distributed between the tow and satisfactory operation of le vehicle Refer to vehicle and the trailer such that the following four Tires General Information in Starting and Oper 1 GVWR Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres 2 GTW sures before trailer usage Continued 368
398. ype mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station 16 Digit Character Display Program Type Program Type 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 A

2011 Jeep Compass Owner Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents